xref: /vim-8.2.3635/src/misc1.c (revision 00a927d6)
1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2  *
3  * VIM - Vi IMproved	by Bram Moolenaar
4  *
5  * Do ":help uganda"  in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6  * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7  * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8  */
9 
10 /*
11  * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12  */
13 
14 #include "vim.h"
15 #include "version.h"
16 
17 static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
18 static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
19 static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u	*src));
20 
21 /*
22  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
23  */
24     int
25 get_indent()
26 {
27     return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
28 }
29 
30 /*
31  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
32  */
33     int
34 get_indent_lnum(lnum)
35     linenr_T	lnum;
36 {
37     return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
38 }
39 
40 #if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
41 /*
42  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
43  * "buf".
44  */
45     int
46 get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
47     buf_T	*buf;
48     linenr_T	lnum;
49 {
50     return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
51 }
52 #endif
53 
54 /*
55  * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
56  * 'tabstop' at "ts"
57  */
58     int
59 get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
60     char_u	*ptr;
61     int		ts;
62 {
63     int		count = 0;
64 
65     for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
66     {
67 	if (*ptr == TAB)    /* count a tab for what it is worth */
68 	    count += ts - (count % ts);
69 	else if (*ptr == ' ')
70 	    ++count;		/* count a space for one */
71 	else
72 	    break;
73     }
74     return count;
75 }
76 
77 /*
78  * Set the indent of the current line.
79  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
80  * Caller must take care of undo.
81  * "flags":
82  *	SIN_CHANGED:	call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
83  *	SIN_INSERT:	insert the indent in front of the line.
84  *	SIN_UNDO:	save line for undo before changing it.
85  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
86  */
87     int
88 set_indent(size, flags)
89     int		size;		    /* measured in spaces */
90     int		flags;
91 {
92     char_u	*p;
93     char_u	*newline;
94     char_u	*oldline;
95     char_u	*s;
96     int		todo;
97     int		ind_len;	    /* measured in characters */
98     int		line_len;
99     int		doit = FALSE;
100     int		ind_done = 0;	    /* measured in spaces */
101     int		tab_pad;
102     int		retval = FALSE;
103     int		orig_char_len = -1; /* number of initial whitespace chars when
104 				       'et' and 'pi' are both set */
105 
106     /*
107      * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
108      * characters needed for the indent.
109      */
110     todo = size;
111     ind_len = 0;
112     p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
113 
114     /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
115      * isn't already set */
116 
117     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs; if both 'expandtab' and
118      * 'preserveindent' are set count the number of characters at the
119      * beginning of the line to be copied */
120     if (!curbuf->b_p_et || (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi))
121     {
122 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
123 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
124 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
125 	{
126 	    ind_done = 0;
127 
128 	    /* count as many characters as we can use */
129 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
130 	    {
131 		if (*p == TAB)
132 		{
133 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
134 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
135 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
136 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
137 			break;
138 		    todo -= tab_pad;
139 		    ++ind_len;
140 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
141 		}
142 		else
143 		{
144 		    --todo;
145 		    ++ind_len;
146 		    ++ind_done;
147 		}
148 		++p;
149 	    }
150 
151 	    /* Set initial number of whitespace chars to copy if we are
152 	     * preserving indent but expandtab is set */
153 	    if (curbuf->b_p_et)
154 		orig_char_len = ind_len;
155 
156 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
157 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
158 	    if (todo >= tab_pad && orig_char_len == -1)
159 	    {
160 		doit = TRUE;
161 		todo -= tab_pad;
162 		++ind_len;
163 		/* ind_done += tab_pad; */
164 	    }
165 	}
166 
167 	/* count tabs required for indent */
168 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
169 	{
170 	    if (*p != TAB)
171 		doit = TRUE;
172 	    else
173 		++p;
174 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
175 	    ++ind_len;
176 	    /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
177 	}
178     }
179     /* count spaces required for indent */
180     while (todo > 0)
181     {
182 	if (*p != ' ')
183 	    doit = TRUE;
184 	else
185 	    ++p;
186 	--todo;
187 	++ind_len;
188 	/* ++ind_done; */
189     }
190 
191     /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
192     if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
193 	return FALSE;
194 
195     /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
196     if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
197 	p = oldline;
198     else
199 	p = skipwhite(p);
200     line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
201 
202     /* If 'preserveindent' and 'expandtab' are both set keep the original
203      * characters and allocate accordingly.  We will fill the rest with spaces
204      * after the if (!curbuf->b_p_et) below. */
205     if (orig_char_len != -1)
206     {
207 	newline = alloc(orig_char_len + size - ind_done + line_len);
208 	if (newline == NULL)
209 	    return FALSE;
210 	todo = size - ind_done;
211 	ind_len = orig_char_len + todo;    /* Set total length of indent in
212 					    * characters, which may have been
213 					    * undercounted until now  */
214 	p = oldline;
215 	s = newline;
216 	while (orig_char_len > 0)
217 	{
218 	    *s++ = *p++;
219 	    orig_char_len--;
220 	}
221 
222 	/* Skip over any additional white space (useful when newindent is less
223 	 * than old) */
224 	while (vim_iswhite(*p))
225 	    ++p;
226 
227     }
228     else
229     {
230 	todo = size;
231 	newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
232 	if (newline == NULL)
233 	    return FALSE;
234 	s = newline;
235     }
236 
237     /* Put the characters in the new line. */
238     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
239     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
240     {
241 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
242 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
243 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
244 	{
245 	    p = oldline;
246 	    ind_done = 0;
247 
248 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
249 	    {
250 		if (*p == TAB)
251 		{
252 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
253 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
254 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
255 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
256 			break;
257 		    todo -= tab_pad;
258 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
259 		}
260 		else
261 		{
262 		    --todo;
263 		    ++ind_done;
264 		}
265 		*s++ = *p++;
266 	    }
267 
268 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
269 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
270 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
271 	    {
272 		*s++ = TAB;
273 		todo -= tab_pad;
274 	    }
275 
276 	    p = skipwhite(p);
277 	}
278 
279 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
280 	{
281 	    *s++ = TAB;
282 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
283 	}
284     }
285     while (todo > 0)
286     {
287 	*s++ = ' ';
288 	--todo;
289     }
290     mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
291 
292     /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
293     if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
294     {
295 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
296 	if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
297 	    changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
298 	/* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
299 	if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
300 				&& saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
301 	    saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (colnr_T)(p - oldline);
302 	retval = TRUE;
303     }
304     else
305 	vim_free(newline);
306 
307     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
308     return retval;
309 }
310 
311 /*
312  * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
313  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
314  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
315  */
316     static int
317 copy_indent(size, src)
318     int		size;
319     char_u	*src;
320 {
321     char_u	*p = NULL;
322     char_u	*line = NULL;
323     char_u	*s;
324     int		todo;
325     int		ind_len;
326     int		line_len = 0;
327     int		tab_pad;
328     int		ind_done;
329     int		round;
330 
331     /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
332      * Round 2: copy the characters. */
333     for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
334     {
335 	todo = size;
336 	ind_len = 0;
337 	ind_done = 0;
338 	s = src;
339 
340 	/* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
341 	while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
342 	{
343 	    if (*s == TAB)
344 	    {
345 		tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
346 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
347 		/* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
348 		if (todo < tab_pad)
349 		    break;
350 		todo -= tab_pad;
351 		ind_done += tab_pad;
352 	    }
353 	    else
354 	    {
355 		--todo;
356 		++ind_done;
357 	    }
358 	    ++ind_len;
359 	    if (p != NULL)
360 		*p++ = *s;
361 	    ++s;
362 	}
363 
364 	/* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
365 	tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
366 	if (todo >= tab_pad)
367 	{
368 	    todo -= tab_pad;
369 	    ++ind_len;
370 	    if (p != NULL)
371 		*p++ = TAB;
372 	}
373 
374 	/* Add tabs required for indent */
375 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
376 	{
377 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
378 	    ++ind_len;
379 	    if (p != NULL)
380 		*p++ = TAB;
381 	}
382 
383 	/* Count/add spaces required for indent */
384 	while (todo > 0)
385 	{
386 	    --todo;
387 	    ++ind_len;
388 	    if (p != NULL)
389 		*p++ = ' ';
390 	}
391 
392 	if (p == NULL)
393 	{
394 	    /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
395 	     * and the rest of the line. */
396 	    line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
397 	    line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
398 	    if (line == NULL)
399 		return FALSE;
400 	    p = line;
401 	}
402     }
403 
404     /* Append the original line */
405     mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
406 
407     /* Replace the line */
408     ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
409 
410     /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
411     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
412     return TRUE;
413 }
414 
415 /*
416  * Return the indent of the current line after a number.  Return -1 if no
417  * number was found.  Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
418  * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
419  */
420     int
421 get_number_indent(lnum)
422     linenr_T	lnum;
423 {
424     colnr_T	col;
425     pos_T	pos;
426     regmmatch_T	regmatch;
427 
428     if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
429 	return -1;
430     pos.lnum = 0;
431     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
432     if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
433     {
434 	regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
435 	regmatch.rmm_maxcol = 0;
436 	if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum,
437 							    (colnr_T)0, NULL))
438 	{
439 	    pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
440 	    pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
441 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
442 	    pos.coladd = 0;
443 #endif
444 	}
445 	vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
446     }
447 
448     if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
449 	return -1;
450     getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
451     return (int)col;
452 }
453 
454 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
455 
456 static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
457 
458 /*
459  * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
460  */
461     static int
462 cin_is_cinword(line)
463     char_u	*line;
464 {
465     char_u	*cinw;
466     char_u	*cinw_buf;
467     int		cinw_len;
468     int		retval = FALSE;
469     int		len;
470 
471     cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
472     cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
473     if (cinw_buf != NULL)
474     {
475 	line = skipwhite(line);
476 	for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
477 	{
478 	    len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
479 	    if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
480 		    && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
481 	    {
482 		retval = TRUE;
483 		break;
484 	    }
485 	}
486 	vim_free(cinw_buf);
487     }
488     return retval;
489 }
490 #endif
491 
492 /*
493  * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
494  *
495  * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
496  * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
497  *
498  * Caller must take care of undo.  Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
499  * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
500  * new line.
501  * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES	delete spaces after cursor
502  *	    OPENLINE_DO_COM	format comments
503  *	    OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL	keep trailing spaces
504  *	    OPENLINE_MARKFIX	adjust mark positions after the line break
505  *
506  * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
507  */
508     int
509 open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
510     int		dir;		/* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
511     int		flags;
512     int		old_indent;	/* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
513 {
514     char_u	*saved_line;		/* copy of the original line */
515     char_u	*next_line = NULL;	/* copy of the next line */
516     char_u	*p_extra = NULL;	/* what goes to next line */
517     int		less_cols = 0;		/* less columns for mark in new line */
518     int		less_cols_off = 0;	/* columns to skip for mark adjust */
519     pos_T	old_cursor;		/* old cursor position */
520     int		newcol = 0;		/* new cursor column */
521     int		newindent = 0;		/* auto-indent of the new line */
522     int		n;
523     int		trunc_line = FALSE;	/* truncate current line afterwards */
524     int		retval = FALSE;		/* return value, default is FAIL */
525 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
526     int		extra_len = 0;		/* length of p_extra string */
527     int		lead_len;		/* length of comment leader */
528     char_u	*lead_flags;	/* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
529     char_u	*leader = NULL;		/* copy of comment leader */
530 #endif
531     char_u	*allocated = NULL;	/* allocated memory */
532 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
533 	|| defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
534     char_u	*p;
535 #endif
536     int		saved_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
537 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
538     pos_T	*pos;
539 #endif
540 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
541     int		do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
542 # ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
543 					&& !curbuf->b_p_cin
544 # endif
545 			);
546     int		no_si = FALSE;		/* reset did_si afterwards */
547     int		first_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
548 #endif
549 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
550     int		vreplace_mode;
551 #endif
552     int		did_append;		/* appended a new line */
553     int		saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
554 
555     /*
556      * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
557      */
558     saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
559     if (saved_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
560 	return FALSE;
561 
562 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
563     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
564     {
565 	/*
566 	 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
567 	 * starting to replace.  First make the new line empty and let vim play
568 	 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content.  Then
569 	 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
570 	 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
571 	 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
572 	 * stuff onto the replace stack.  -- webb.
573 	 */
574 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
575 	    next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
576 	else
577 	    next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
578 	if (next_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
579 	    goto theend;
580 
581 	/*
582 	 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
583 	 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
584 	 * line onto the replace stack.  We'll push any other characters that
585 	 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
586 	 * etc) a bit later.
587 	 */
588 	replace_push(NUL);  /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
589 	replace_push(NUL);
590 	p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
591 	while (*p != NUL)
592 	{
593 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
594 	    if (has_mbyte)
595 		p += replace_push_mb(p);
596 	    else
597 #endif
598 		replace_push(*p++);
599 	}
600 	saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
601     }
602 #endif
603 
604     if ((State & INSERT)
605 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
606 	    && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
607 #endif
608 	    )
609     {
610 	p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
611 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
612 	if (do_si)		/* need first char after new line break */
613 	{
614 	    p = skipwhite(p_extra);
615 	    first_char = *p;
616 	}
617 #endif
618 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
619 	extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
620 #endif
621 	saved_char = *p_extra;
622 	*p_extra = NUL;
623     }
624 
625     u_clearline();		/* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
626 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
627     did_si = FALSE;
628 #endif
629     ai_col = 0;
630 
631     /*
632      * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
633      * the prior line, and it should be truncated.  Do this even if 'ai' is not
634      * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
635      */
636     if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
637 	trunc_line = TRUE;
638 
639     /*
640      * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
641      * indent to use for the new line.
642      */
643     if (curbuf->b_p_ai
644 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
645 			|| do_si
646 #endif
647 					    )
648     {
649 	/*
650 	 * count white space on current line
651 	 */
652 	newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
653 	if (newindent == 0)
654 	    newindent = old_indent;	/* for ^^D command in insert mode */
655 
656 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
657 	/*
658 	 * Do smart indenting.
659 	 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
660 	 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
661 	 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
662 	 *	"if (condition) {"
663 	 */
664 	if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
665 				    && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
666 	{
667 	    char_u  *ptr;
668 	    char_u  last_char;
669 
670 	    old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
671 	    ptr = saved_line;
672 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
673 	    if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
674 		lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
675 	    else
676 		lead_len = 0;
677 # endif
678 	    if (dir == FORWARD)
679 	    {
680 		/*
681 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
682 		 * recognised as comments.
683 		 */
684 		if (
685 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
686 			lead_len == 0 &&
687 # endif
688 			ptr[0] == '#')
689 		{
690 		    while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
691 			ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
692 		    newindent = get_indent();
693 		}
694 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
695 		if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
696 		    lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
697 		else
698 		    lead_len = 0;
699 		if (lead_len > 0)
700 		{
701 		    /*
702 		     * This case gets the following right:
703 		     *	    \*
704 		     *	     * A comment (read '\' as '/').
705 		     *	     *\
706 		     * #define IN_THE_WAY
707 		     *	    This should line up here;
708 		     */
709 		    p = skipwhite(ptr);
710 		    if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
711 			p++;
712 		    if (p[0] == '*')
713 		    {
714 			for (p++; *p; p++)
715 			{
716 			    if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
717 			    {
718 				/*
719 				 * End of C comment, indent should line up
720 				 * with the line containing the start of
721 				 * the comment
722 				 */
723 				curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
724 				if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
725 				{
726 				    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
727 				    newindent = get_indent();
728 				}
729 			    }
730 			}
731 		    }
732 		}
733 		else	/* Not a comment line */
734 # endif
735 		{
736 		    /* Find last non-blank in line */
737 		    p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
738 		    while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
739 			--p;
740 		    last_char = *p;
741 
742 		    /*
743 		     * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
744 		     */
745 		    if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
746 		    {
747 			if (p > ptr)
748 			    --p;
749 			while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
750 			    --p;
751 		    }
752 		    /*
753 		     * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
754 		     * lines.  eg:
755 		     *	    if (condition &&
756 		     *			condition) {
757 		     *		Should line up here!
758 		     *	    }
759 		     */
760 		    if (*p == ')')
761 		    {
762 			curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
763 			if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
764 			{
765 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
766 			    newindent = get_indent();
767 			    ptr = ml_get_curline();
768 			}
769 		    }
770 		    /*
771 		     * If last character is '{' do indent, without
772 		     * checking for "if" and the like.
773 		     */
774 		    if (last_char == '{')
775 		    {
776 			did_si = TRUE;	/* do indent */
777 			no_si = TRUE;	/* don't delete it when '{' typed */
778 		    }
779 		    /*
780 		     * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
781 		     * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
782 		     * '}'.
783 		     */
784 		    else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
785 						       && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
786 			did_si = TRUE;
787 		}
788 	    }
789 	    else /* dir == BACKWARD */
790 	    {
791 		/*
792 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
793 		 * recognised as comments.
794 		 */
795 		if (
796 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
797 			lead_len == 0 &&
798 # endif
799 			ptr[0] == '#')
800 		{
801 		    int was_backslashed = FALSE;
802 
803 		    while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
804 			 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
805 		    {
806 			if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
807 			    was_backslashed = TRUE;
808 			else
809 			    was_backslashed = FALSE;
810 			ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
811 		    }
812 		    if (was_backslashed)
813 			newindent = 0;	    /* Got to end of file */
814 		    else
815 			newindent = get_indent();
816 		}
817 		p = skipwhite(ptr);
818 		if (*p == '}')	    /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
819 		    did_si = TRUE;
820 		else		    /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
821 		    can_si_back = TRUE;
822 	    }
823 	    curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
824 	}
825 	if (do_si)
826 	    can_si = TRUE;
827 #endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
828 
829 	did_ai = TRUE;
830     }
831 
832 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
833     /*
834      * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
835      * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
836      */
837     end_comment_pending = NUL;
838     if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
839 	lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
840     else
841 	lead_len = 0;
842     if (lead_len > 0)
843     {
844 	char_u	*lead_repl = NULL;	    /* replaces comment leader */
845 	int	lead_repl_len = 0;	    /* length of *lead_repl */
846 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];   /* middle-comment string */
847 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];	    /* end-comment string */
848 	char_u	*comment_end = NULL;	    /* where lead_end has been found */
849 	int	extra_space = FALSE;	    /* append extra space */
850 	int	current_flag;
851 	int	require_blank = FALSE;	    /* requires blank after middle */
852 	char_u	*p2;
853 
854 	/*
855 	 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
856 	 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
857 	 */
858 	for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
859 	{
860 	    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
861 	    {
862 		require_blank = TRUE;
863 		continue;
864 	    }
865 	    if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
866 	    {
867 		current_flag = *p;
868 		if (*p == COM_START)
869 		{
870 		    /*
871 		     * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
872 		     */
873 		    if (dir == BACKWARD)
874 		    {
875 			lead_len = 0;
876 			break;
877 		    }
878 
879 		    /* find start of middle part */
880 		    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
881 		    require_blank = FALSE;
882 		}
883 
884 		/*
885 		 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
886 		 */
887 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of middle flags */
888 		{
889 		    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
890 			require_blank = TRUE;
891 		    ++p;
892 		}
893 		(void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
894 
895 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of end flags */
896 		{
897 		    /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
898 		    if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
899 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
900 		    ++p;
901 		}
902 		n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
903 
904 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)	/* we can set it now */
905 		    end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
906 
907 		/*
908 		 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
909 		 * the comment leader.
910 		 */
911 		if (dir == FORWARD)
912 		{
913 		    for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
914 			if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
915 			{
916 			    comment_end = p;
917 			    lead_len = 0;
918 			    break;
919 			}
920 		}
921 
922 		/*
923 		 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
924 		 */
925 		if (lead_len > 0)
926 		{
927 		    if (current_flag == COM_START)
928 		    {
929 			lead_repl = lead_middle;
930 			lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
931 		    }
932 
933 		    /*
934 		     * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
935 		     * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
936 		     * comment leader on the next line.
937 		     */
938 		    if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
939 			    && ((p_extra != NULL
940 				    && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
941 				|| (p_extra == NULL
942 				    && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
943 				|| require_blank))
944 			extra_space = TRUE;
945 		}
946 		break;
947 	    }
948 	    if (*p == COM_END)
949 	    {
950 		/*
951 		 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
952 		 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
953 		 * start (for C-comments).
954 		 */
955 		if (dir == FORWARD)
956 		{
957 		    comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
958 		    lead_len = 0;
959 		    break;
960 		}
961 
962 		/*
963 		 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
964 		 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
965 		 */
966 		while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
967 		    --p;
968 		for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
969 					 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
970 		    ;
971 		lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
972 
973 		/* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
974 		 * the comment-end */
975 		extra_space = TRUE;
976 
977 		/* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
978 		for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
979 		{
980 		    if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
981 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
982 		}
983 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)
984 		{
985 		    /* Find last character in end-comment string */
986 		    while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
987 			p2++;
988 		    end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
989 		}
990 		break;
991 	    }
992 	    if (*p == COM_FIRST)
993 	    {
994 		/*
995 		 * Comment leader for first line only:	Don't repeat leader
996 		 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
997 		 */
998 		if (dir == BACKWARD)
999 		    lead_len = 0;
1000 		else
1001 		{
1002 		    lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
1003 		    lead_repl_len = 0;
1004 		}
1005 		break;
1006 	    }
1007 	}
1008 	if (lead_len)
1009 	{
1010 	    /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
1011 	    leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
1012 							      extra_len + 1);
1013 	    allocated = leader;		    /* remember to free it later */
1014 
1015 	    if (leader == NULL)
1016 		lead_len = 0;
1017 	    else
1018 	    {
1019 		vim_strncpy(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
1020 
1021 		/*
1022 		 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
1023 		 */
1024 		if (lead_repl != NULL)
1025 		{
1026 		    int		c = 0;
1027 		    int		off = 0;
1028 
1029 		    for (p = lead_flags; *p != NUL && *p != ':'; )
1030 		    {
1031 			if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
1032 			    c = *p++;
1033 			else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
1034 			    off = getdigits(&p);
1035 			else
1036 			    ++p;
1037 		    }
1038 		    if (c == COM_RIGHT)    /* right adjusted leader */
1039 		    {
1040 			/* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
1041 			for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
1042 						      && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
1043 			    ;
1044 			++p;
1045 
1046 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1047 			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1048 			 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1049 			{
1050 			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1051 							       lead_repl_len);
1052 			    int	    old_size = 0;
1053 			    char_u  *endp = p;
1054 			    int	    l;
1055 
1056 			    while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1057 			    {
1058 				mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
1059 				old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1060 			    }
1061 			    l = lead_repl_len - (int)(endp - p);
1062 			    if (l != 0)
1063 				mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1064 					(size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1065 			    lead_len += l;
1066 			}
1067 #else
1068 			if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1069 			    p = leader;
1070 			else
1071 			    p -= lead_repl_len;
1072 #endif
1073 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1074 			if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1075 			    p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1076 
1077 			/* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1078 			while (--p >= leader)
1079 			{
1080 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1081 			    int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1082 
1083 			    if (l > 1)
1084 			    {
1085 				p -= l;
1086 				if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1087 				{
1088 				    p[1] = ' ';
1089 				    --l;
1090 				}
1091 				mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1092 				   (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1093 				lead_len -= l;
1094 				*p = ' ';
1095 			    }
1096 			    else
1097 #endif
1098 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1099 				*p = ' ';
1100 			}
1101 		    }
1102 		    else		    /* left adjusted leader */
1103 		    {
1104 			p = skipwhite(leader);
1105 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1106 			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1107 			 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1108 			 * not to be overwritten. */
1109 			{
1110 			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1111 							       lead_repl_len);
1112 			    int	    i;
1113 			    int	    l;
1114 
1115 			    for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1116 			    {
1117 				l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
1118 				if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1119 				    break;
1120 			    }
1121 			    if (i != lead_repl_len)
1122 			    {
1123 				mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1124 				       (size_t)(lead_len - i - (p - leader)));
1125 				lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1126 			    }
1127 			}
1128 #endif
1129 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1130 
1131 			/* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1132 			 * leader by spaces.  Keep Tabs, the indent must
1133 			 * remain the same. */
1134 			for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1135 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1136 			    {
1137 				/* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1138 				if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1139 				{
1140 				    --lead_len;
1141 				    mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1142 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1143 				}
1144 				else
1145 				{
1146 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1147 				    int	    l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
1148 
1149 				    if (l > 1)
1150 				    {
1151 					if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1152 					{
1153 					    /* Replace a double-wide char with
1154 					     * two spaces */
1155 					    --l;
1156 					    *p++ = ' ';
1157 					}
1158 					mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1159 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1160 					lead_len -= l - 1;
1161 				    }
1162 #endif
1163 				    *p = ' ';
1164 				}
1165 			    }
1166 			*p = NUL;
1167 		    }
1168 
1169 		    /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1170 		    if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1171 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1172 					|| do_si
1173 #endif
1174 							   )
1175 			newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1176 
1177 		    /* Add the indent offset */
1178 		    if (newindent + off < 0)
1179 		    {
1180 			off = -newindent;
1181 			newindent = 0;
1182 		    }
1183 		    else
1184 			newindent += off;
1185 
1186 		    /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1187 		     * alignment remains equal. */
1188 		    while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1189 					       && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1190 		    {
1191 			/* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1192 			if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1193 			    break;
1194 			--lead_len;
1195 			--off;
1196 		    }
1197 
1198 		    /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1199 		     * extra space */
1200 		    if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1201 			extra_space = FALSE;
1202 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1203 		}
1204 
1205 		if (extra_space)
1206 		{
1207 		    leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1208 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1209 		}
1210 
1211 		newcol = lead_len;
1212 
1213 		/*
1214 		 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1215 		 * is in the comment leader
1216 		 */
1217 		if (newindent
1218 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1219 				|| did_si
1220 #endif
1221 					   )
1222 		{
1223 		    while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1224 		    {
1225 			--lead_len;
1226 			--newcol;
1227 			++leader;
1228 		    }
1229 		}
1230 
1231 	    }
1232 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1233 	    did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1234 #endif
1235 	}
1236 	else if (comment_end != NULL)
1237 	{
1238 	    /*
1239 	     * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1240 	     * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1241 	     * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1242 	     * comment.
1243 	     */
1244 	    if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1245 			(curbuf->b_p_ai
1246 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1247 					|| do_si
1248 #endif
1249 							   ))
1250 	    {
1251 		old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1252 		curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1253 		if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1254 		{
1255 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1256 		    newindent = get_indent();
1257 		}
1258 		curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1259 	    }
1260 	}
1261     }
1262 #endif
1263 
1264     /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1265     if (p_extra != NULL)
1266     {
1267 	*p_extra = saved_char;		/* restore char that NUL replaced */
1268 
1269 	/*
1270 	 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1271 	 * non-blank.
1272 	 *
1273 	 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1274 	 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1275 	 */
1276 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1277 	    replace_push(NUL);	    /* end of extra blanks */
1278 	if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1279 	{
1280 	    while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1281 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1282 		    && (!enc_utf8
1283 			       || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1284 #endif
1285 		    )
1286 	    {
1287 		if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1288 		    replace_push(*p_extra);
1289 		++p_extra;
1290 		++less_cols_off;
1291 	    }
1292 	}
1293 	if (*p_extra != NUL)
1294 	    did_ai = FALSE;	    /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1295 
1296 	/* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1297 	less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1298     }
1299 
1300     if (p_extra == NULL)
1301 	p_extra = (char_u *)"";		    /* append empty line */
1302 
1303 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1304     /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1305     if (lead_len)
1306     {
1307 	STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1308 	p_extra = leader;
1309 	did_ai = TRUE;	    /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1310 	less_cols -= lead_len;
1311     }
1312     else
1313 	end_comment_pending = NUL;  /* turns out there was no leader */
1314 #endif
1315 
1316     old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1317     if (dir == BACKWARD)
1318 	--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1319 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1320     if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1321 #endif
1322     {
1323 	if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1324 								      == FAIL)
1325 	    goto theend;
1326 	/* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1327 	 * with markers. */
1328 	mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1329 	did_append = TRUE;
1330     }
1331 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1332     else
1333     {
1334 	/*
1335 	 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1336 	 */
1337 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1338 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1339 	{
1340 	    /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1341 	     * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1342 	     */
1343 	    (void)u_save_cursor();		    /* errors are ignored! */
1344 	    vr_lines_changed++;
1345 	}
1346 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1347 	changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1348 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1349 	did_append = FALSE;
1350     }
1351 #endif
1352 
1353     if (newindent
1354 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1355 		    || did_si
1356 #endif
1357 				)
1358     {
1359 	++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1360 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1361 	if (did_si)
1362 	{
1363 	    if (p_sr)
1364 		newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1365 	    newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1366 	}
1367 #endif
1368 	/* Copy the indent */
1369 	if (curbuf->b_p_ci)
1370 	{
1371 	    (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1372 
1373 	    /*
1374 	     * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1375 	     * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1376 	     * it.  It gets restored at the function end.
1377 	     */
1378 	    curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1379 	}
1380 	else
1381 	    (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1382 	less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1383 
1384 	ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1385 
1386 	/*
1387 	 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1388 	 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1389 	 */
1390 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1391 	    for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1392 		replace_push(NUL);
1393 	newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1394 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1395 	if (no_si)
1396 	    did_si = FALSE;
1397 #endif
1398     }
1399 
1400 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1401     /*
1402      * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1403      * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1404      */
1405     if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1406 	while (lead_len-- > 0)
1407 	    replace_push(NUL);
1408 #endif
1409 
1410     curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1411 
1412     if (dir == FORWARD)
1413     {
1414 	if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1415 	{
1416 	    /* truncate current line at cursor */
1417 	    saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1418 	    /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1419 	    if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1420 		truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1421 	    ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1422 	    saved_line = NULL;
1423 	    if (did_append)
1424 	    {
1425 		changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1426 					       curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1427 		did_append = FALSE;
1428 
1429 		/* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1430 		if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1431 		    mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1432 					 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1433 							1L, (long)-less_cols);
1434 	    }
1435 	    else
1436 		changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1437 	}
1438 
1439 	/*
1440 	 * Put the cursor on the new line.  Careful: the scrollup() above may
1441 	 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1442 	 */
1443 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1444     }
1445     if (did_append)
1446 	changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1447 
1448     curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1449 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1450     curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1451 #endif
1452 
1453 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1454     /*
1455      * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1456      * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1457      * normal INSERT mode.
1458      */
1459     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1460     {
1461 	vreplace_mode = State;	/* So we know to put things right later */
1462 	State = INSERT;
1463     }
1464     else
1465 	vreplace_mode = 0;
1466 #endif
1467 #ifdef FEAT_LISP
1468     /*
1469      * May do lisp indenting.
1470      */
1471     if (!p_paste
1472 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1473 	    && leader == NULL
1474 # endif
1475 	    && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1476 	    && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1477     {
1478 	fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1479 	p = ml_get_curline();
1480 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1481     }
1482 #endif
1483 #ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1484     /*
1485      * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1486      */
1487     if (!p_paste
1488 	    && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1489 #  ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1490 		    || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1491 #  endif
1492 		)
1493 	    && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1494 		? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1495 		: KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1496     {
1497 	do_c_expr_indent();
1498 	p = ml_get_curline();
1499 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1500     }
1501 #endif
1502 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1503     if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1504 	State = vreplace_mode;
1505 #endif
1506 
1507 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1508     /*
1509      * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1510      * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1511      * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1512      */
1513     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1514     {
1515 	/* Put new line in p_extra */
1516 	p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1517 	if (p_extra == NULL)
1518 	    goto theend;
1519 
1520 	/* Put back original line */
1521 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1522 
1523 	/* Insert new stuff into line again */
1524 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1525 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1526 	curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1527 #endif
1528 	ins_bytes(p_extra);	/* will call changed_bytes() */
1529 	vim_free(p_extra);
1530 	next_line = NULL;
1531     }
1532 #endif
1533 
1534     retval = TRUE;		/* success! */
1535 theend:
1536     curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1537     vim_free(saved_line);
1538     vim_free(next_line);
1539     vim_free(allocated);
1540     return retval;
1541 }
1542 
1543 #if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1544 /*
1545  * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1546  * which introduces a comment.	If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1547  * returned.
1548  * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1549  * comment leader.
1550  * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1551  */
1552     int
1553 get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1554     char_u	*line;
1555     char_u	**flags;
1556     int		backward;
1557 {
1558     int		i, j;
1559     int		got_com = FALSE;
1560     int		found_one;
1561     char_u	part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* buffer for one option part */
1562     char_u	*string;		/* pointer to comment string */
1563     char_u	*list;
1564 
1565     i = 0;
1566     while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))    /* leading white space is ignored */
1567 	++i;
1568 
1569     /*
1570      * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1571      */
1572     while (line[i])
1573     {
1574 	/*
1575 	 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1576 	 */
1577 	found_one = FALSE;
1578 	for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1579 	{
1580 	    /*
1581 	     * Get one option part into part_buf[].  Advance list to next one.
1582 	     * put string at start of string.
1583 	     */
1584 	    if (!got_com && flags != NULL)  /* remember where flags started */
1585 		*flags = list;
1586 	    (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1587 	    string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1588 	    if (string == NULL)	    /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1589 		continue;
1590 	    *string++ = NUL;	    /* isolate flags from string */
1591 
1592 	    /*
1593 	     * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1594 	     * nested comments.
1595 	     */
1596 	    if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1597 		continue;
1598 
1599 	    /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1600 	    if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1601 		continue;
1602 
1603 	    /*
1604 	     * Line contents and string must match.
1605 	     * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1606 	     * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1607 	     * TABs and spaces).
1608 	     */
1609 	    if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1610 	    {
1611 		if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1612 		    continue;
1613 		while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1614 		    ++string;
1615 	    }
1616 	    for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1617 		;
1618 	    if (string[j] != NUL)
1619 		continue;
1620 
1621 	    /*
1622 	     * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1623 	     * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1624 	     */
1625 	    if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1626 			   && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1627 		continue;
1628 
1629 	    /*
1630 	     * We have found a match, stop searching.
1631 	     */
1632 	    i += j;
1633 	    got_com = TRUE;
1634 	    found_one = TRUE;
1635 	    break;
1636 	}
1637 
1638 	/*
1639 	 * No match found, stop scanning.
1640 	 */
1641 	if (!found_one)
1642 	    break;
1643 
1644 	/*
1645 	 * Include any trailing white space.
1646 	 */
1647 	while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1648 	    ++i;
1649 
1650 	/*
1651 	 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1652 	 */
1653 	if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1654 	    break;
1655     }
1656     return (got_com ? i : 0);
1657 }
1658 #endif
1659 
1660 /*
1661  * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1662  */
1663     int
1664 plines(lnum)
1665     linenr_T	lnum;
1666 {
1667     return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1668 }
1669 
1670     int
1671 plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1672     win_T	*wp;
1673     linenr_T	lnum;
1674     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1675 {
1676 #if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1677     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1678      * is one line anyway. */
1679     return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1680 }
1681 
1682     int
1683 plines_nofill(lnum)
1684     linenr_T	lnum;
1685 {
1686     return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1687 }
1688 
1689     int
1690 plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1691     win_T	*wp;
1692     linenr_T	lnum;
1693     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1694 {
1695 #endif
1696     int		lines;
1697 
1698     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1699 	return 1;
1700 
1701 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1702     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1703 	return 1;
1704 #endif
1705 
1706 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1707     /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1708     /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1709     if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1710 	return 1;
1711 #endif
1712 
1713     lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1714     if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1715 	return (int)wp->w_height;
1716     return lines;
1717 }
1718 
1719 /*
1720  * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1721  * "wp".  Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1722  */
1723     int
1724 plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1725     win_T	*wp;
1726     linenr_T	lnum;
1727 {
1728     char_u	*s;
1729     long	col;
1730     int		width;
1731 
1732     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1733     if (*s == NUL)		/* empty line */
1734 	return 1;
1735     col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1736 
1737     /*
1738      * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1739      * extra column.
1740      */
1741     if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1742 	col += 1;
1743 
1744     /*
1745      * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1746      */
1747     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1748     if (width <= 0)
1749 	return 32000;
1750     if (col <= width)
1751 	return 1;
1752     col -= width;
1753     width += win_col_off2(wp);
1754     return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1755 }
1756 
1757 /*
1758  * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1759  * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1760  */
1761     int
1762 plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1763     win_T	*wp;
1764     linenr_T	lnum;
1765     long	column;
1766 {
1767     long	col;
1768     char_u	*s;
1769     int		lines = 0;
1770     int		width;
1771 
1772 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1773     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1774      * is one line anyway. */
1775     lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1776 #endif
1777 
1778     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1779 	return lines + 1;
1780 
1781 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1782     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1783 	return lines + 1;
1784 #endif
1785 
1786     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1787 
1788     col = 0;
1789     while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1790     {
1791 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
1792 	mb_ptr_adv(s);
1793     }
1794 
1795     /*
1796      * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1797      * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1798      * screen position of the TAB.  This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1799      * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1800      * 'ts') -- webb.
1801      */
1802     if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1803 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1804 
1805     /*
1806      * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1807      */
1808     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1809     if (width <= 0)
1810 	return 9999;
1811 
1812     lines += 1;
1813     if (col > width)
1814 	lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp)) + 1;
1815     return lines;
1816 }
1817 
1818     int
1819 plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1820     win_T	*wp;
1821     linenr_T	first, last;
1822 {
1823     int		count = 0;
1824 
1825     while (first <= last)
1826     {
1827 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1828 	int	x;
1829 
1830 	/* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1831 	 * that are maybe folded. */
1832 	x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1833 	if (x > 0)
1834 	{
1835 	    ++count;	    /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1836 	    first += x;
1837 	}
1838 	else
1839 #endif
1840 	{
1841 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1842 	    if (first == wp->w_topline)
1843 		count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1844 	    else
1845 #endif
1846 		count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1847 	    ++first;
1848 	}
1849     }
1850     return (count);
1851 }
1852 
1853 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1854 /*
1855  * Insert string "p" at the cursor position.  Stops at a NUL byte.
1856  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1857  */
1858     void
1859 ins_bytes(p)
1860     char_u	*p;
1861 {
1862     ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1863 }
1864 #endif
1865 
1866 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1867 	|| defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1868 /*
1869  * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1870  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1871  */
1872     void
1873 ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1874     char_u	*p;
1875     int		len;
1876 {
1877     int		i;
1878 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1879     int		n;
1880 
1881     if (has_mbyte)
1882 	for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1883 	{
1884 	    if (enc_utf8)
1885 		/* avoid reading past p[len] */
1886 		n = utfc_ptr2len_len(p + i, len - i);
1887 	    else
1888 		n = (*mb_ptr2len)(p + i);
1889 	    ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1890 	}
1891     else
1892 # endif
1893 	for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1894 	    ins_char(p[i]);
1895 }
1896 #endif
1897 
1898 /*
1899  * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1900  * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1901  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1902  * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1903  * convert bytes to a character.
1904  */
1905     void
1906 ins_char(c)
1907     int		c;
1908 {
1909 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1910     char_u	buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1911     int		n;
1912 
1913     n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1914 
1915     /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1916      * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1917     if (buf[0] == 0)
1918 	buf[0] = '\n';
1919 
1920     ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1921 }
1922 
1923     void
1924 ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1925     char_u	*buf;
1926     int		charlen;
1927 {
1928     int		c = buf[0];
1929 #endif
1930     int		newlen;		/* nr of bytes inserted */
1931     int		oldlen;		/* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1932     char_u	*p;
1933     char_u	*newp;
1934     char_u	*oldp;
1935     int		linelen;	/* length of old line including NUL */
1936     colnr_T	col;
1937     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1938     int		i;
1939 
1940 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1941     /* Break tabs if needed. */
1942     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1943 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
1944 #endif
1945 
1946     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1947     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1948     linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1949 
1950     /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1951     oldlen = 0;
1952 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1953     newlen = charlen;
1954 #else
1955     newlen = 1;
1956 #endif
1957 
1958     if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1959     {
1960 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1961 	if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1962 	{
1963 	    colnr_T	new_vcol = 0;   /* init for GCC */
1964 	    colnr_T	vcol;
1965 	    int		old_list;
1966 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1967 	    char_u	buf[2];
1968 #endif
1969 
1970 	    /*
1971 	     * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1972 	     * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1973 	     * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1974 	     */
1975 	    old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1976 	    if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1977 		curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1978 
1979 	    /*
1980 	     * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1981 	     * characters (zero if it's a TAB).  Count the number of bytes to
1982 	     * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1983 	     * cells.  May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1984 	     */
1985 	    getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1986 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1987 	    buf[0] = c;
1988 	    buf[1] = NUL;
1989 #endif
1990 	    new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1991 	    while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1992 	    {
1993 		vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1994 		/* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1995 		 * position. */
1996 		if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1997 		    break;
1998 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1999 		oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col + oldlen);
2000 #else
2001 		++oldlen;
2002 #endif
2003 		/* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
2004 		if (vcol > new_vcol)
2005 		    newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
2006 	    }
2007 	    curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
2008 	}
2009 	else
2010 #endif
2011 	    if (oldp[col] != NUL)
2012 	{
2013 	    /* normal replace */
2014 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2015 	    oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len)(oldp + col);
2016 #else
2017 	    oldlen = 1;
2018 #endif
2019 	}
2020 
2021 
2022 	/* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
2023 	 * put back when BS is used.  The bytes of a multi-byte character are
2024 	 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
2025 	 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
2026 	replace_push(NUL);
2027 	for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
2028 	{
2029 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2030 	    if (has_mbyte)
2031 		i += replace_push_mb(oldp + col + i) - 1;
2032 	    else
2033 #endif
2034 		replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
2035 	}
2036     }
2037 
2038     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
2039     if (newp == NULL)
2040 	return;
2041 
2042     /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2043     if (col > 0)
2044 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2045 
2046     /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2047     p = newp + col;
2048     mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2049 					    (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2050 
2051     /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2052 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2053     mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2054     i = charlen;
2055 #else
2056     *p = c;
2057     i = 1;
2058 #endif
2059 
2060     /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2061     while (i < newlen)
2062 	p[i++] = ' ';
2063 
2064     /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2065     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2066 
2067     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2068     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2069 
2070     /*
2071      * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2072      * show the match for right parens and braces.
2073      */
2074     if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2075 	    && msg_silent == 0
2076 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2077 	    && charlen == 1
2078 #endif
2079 #ifdef FEAT_INS_EXPAND
2080 	    && !ins_compl_active()
2081 #endif
2082        )
2083 	showmatch(c);
2084 
2085 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2086     if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2087 #endif
2088     {
2089 	/* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2090 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2091 	curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2092 #else
2093 	++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2094 #endif
2095     }
2096     /*
2097      * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2098      */
2099 }
2100 
2101 /*
2102  * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2103  * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2104  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2105  */
2106     void
2107 ins_str(s)
2108     char_u	*s;
2109 {
2110     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2111     int		newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2112     int		oldlen;
2113     colnr_T	col;
2114     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2115 
2116 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2117     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2118 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
2119 #endif
2120 
2121     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2122     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2123     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2124 
2125     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2126     if (newp == NULL)
2127 	return;
2128     if (col > 0)
2129 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2130     mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2131     mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2132     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2133     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2134     curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2135 }
2136 
2137 /*
2138  * Delete one character under the cursor.
2139  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2140  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2141  *
2142  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2143  */
2144     int
2145 del_char(fixpos)
2146     int		fixpos;
2147 {
2148 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2149     if (has_mbyte)
2150     {
2151 	/* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2152 	mb_adjust_cursor();
2153 	if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2154 	    return FAIL;
2155 	return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2156     }
2157 #endif
2158     return del_bytes(1L, fixpos, TRUE);
2159 }
2160 
2161 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2162 /*
2163  * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2164  */
2165     int
2166 del_chars(count, fixpos)
2167     long	count;
2168     int		fixpos;
2169 {
2170     long	bytes = 0;
2171     long	i;
2172     char_u	*p;
2173     int		l;
2174 
2175     p = ml_get_cursor();
2176     for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2177     {
2178 	l = (*mb_ptr2len)(p);
2179 	bytes += l;
2180 	p += l;
2181     }
2182     return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos, TRUE);
2183 }
2184 #endif
2185 
2186 /*
2187  * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2188  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2189  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2190  *
2191  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2192  */
2193     int
2194 del_bytes(count, fixpos_arg, use_delcombine)
2195     long	count;
2196     int		fixpos_arg;
2197     int		use_delcombine UNUSED;	    /* 'delcombine' option applies */
2198 {
2199     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2200     colnr_T	oldlen;
2201     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2202     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2203     int		was_alloced;
2204     long	movelen;
2205     int		fixpos = fixpos_arg;
2206 
2207     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2208     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2209 
2210     /*
2211      * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2212      */
2213     if (col >= oldlen)
2214 	return FAIL;
2215 
2216 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2217     /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2218      * delete the last combining character. */
2219     if (p_deco && use_delcombine && enc_utf8
2220 					 && utfc_ptr2len(oldp + col) >= count)
2221     {
2222 	int	cc[MAX_MCO];
2223 	int	n;
2224 
2225 	(void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, cc);
2226 	if (cc[0] != NUL)
2227 	{
2228 	    /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2229 	    n = col;
2230 	    do
2231 	    {
2232 		col = n;
2233 		count = utf_ptr2len(oldp + n);
2234 		n += count;
2235 	    } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2236 	    fixpos = 0;
2237 	}
2238     }
2239 #endif
2240 
2241     /*
2242      * When count is too big, reduce it.
2243      */
2244     movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2245     if (movelen <= 1)
2246     {
2247 	/*
2248 	 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2249 	 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL,
2250 	 * unless "restart_edit" is set or 'virtualedit' contains "onemore".
2251 	 */
2252 	if (col > 0 && fixpos && restart_edit == 0
2253 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2254 					      && (ve_flags & VE_ONEMORE) == 0
2255 #endif
2256 					      )
2257 	{
2258 	    --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2259 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2260 	    curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2261 #endif
2262 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2263 	    if (has_mbyte)
2264 		curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2265 			    (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2266 #endif
2267 	}
2268 	count = oldlen - col;
2269 	movelen = 1;
2270     }
2271 
2272     /*
2273      * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2274      * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2275      * Can't do this when using Netbeans, because we would need to invoke
2276      * netbeans_removed(), which deallocates the line.  Let ml_replace() take
2277      * care of notifiying Netbeans.
2278      */
2279 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2280     if (usingNetbeans)
2281 	was_alloced = FALSE;
2282     else
2283 #endif
2284 	was_alloced = ml_line_alloced();    /* check if oldp was allocated */
2285     if (was_alloced)
2286 	newp = oldp;			    /* use same allocated memory */
2287     else
2288     {					    /* need to allocate a new line */
2289 	newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2290 	if (newp == NULL)
2291 	    return FAIL;
2292 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2293     }
2294     mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2295     if (!was_alloced)
2296 	ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2297 
2298     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2299     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2300 
2301     return OK;
2302 }
2303 
2304 /*
2305  * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2306  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2307  *
2308  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2309  */
2310     int
2311 truncate_line(fixpos)
2312     int		fixpos;	    /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2313 {
2314     char_u	*newp;
2315     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2316     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2317 
2318     if (col == 0)
2319 	newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2320     else
2321 	newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2322 
2323     if (newp == NULL)
2324 	return FAIL;
2325 
2326     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2327 
2328     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2329     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2330 
2331     /*
2332      * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2333      */
2334     if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2335 	--curwin->w_cursor.col;
2336 
2337     return OK;
2338 }
2339 
2340 /*
2341  * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2342  * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2343  */
2344     void
2345 del_lines(nlines, undo)
2346     long	nlines;		/* number of lines to delete */
2347     int		undo;		/* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2348 {
2349     long	n;
2350     linenr_T	first = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2351 
2352     if (nlines <= 0)
2353 	return;
2354 
2355     /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2356     if (undo && u_savedel(first, nlines) == FAIL)
2357 	return;
2358 
2359     for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2360     {
2361 	if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY)	    /* nothing to delete */
2362 	    break;
2363 
2364 	ml_delete(first, TRUE);
2365 	++n;
2366 
2367 	/* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2368 	if (first > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2369 	    break;
2370     }
2371 
2372     /* Correct the cursor position before calling deleted_lines_mark(), it may
2373      * trigger a callback to display the cursor. */
2374     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2375     check_cursor_lnum();
2376 
2377     /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2378     deleted_lines_mark(first, n);
2379 }
2380 
2381     int
2382 gchar_pos(pos)
2383     pos_T *pos;
2384 {
2385     char_u	*ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2386 
2387 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2388     if (has_mbyte)
2389 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2390 #endif
2391     return (int)*ptr;
2392 }
2393 
2394     int
2395 gchar_cursor()
2396 {
2397 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2398     if (has_mbyte)
2399 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2400 #endif
2401     return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2402 }
2403 
2404 /*
2405  * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2406  * It is directly written into the block.
2407  */
2408     void
2409 pchar_cursor(c)
2410     int c;
2411 {
2412     *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2413 						  + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2414 }
2415 
2416 #if 0 /* not used */
2417 /*
2418  * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2419  */
2420     void
2421 goto_endofbuf(pos)
2422     pos_T    *pos;
2423 {
2424     char_u  *p;
2425 
2426     pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2427     pos->col = 0;
2428     p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2429     while (*p++)
2430 	++pos->col;
2431 }
2432 #endif
2433 
2434 /*
2435  * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2436  *		    non-blank in the line.
2437  * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2438  *		    the line.
2439  */
2440     int
2441 inindent(extra)
2442     int	    extra;
2443 {
2444     char_u	*ptr;
2445     colnr_T	col;
2446 
2447     for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2448 	++ptr;
2449     if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2450 	return TRUE;
2451     else
2452 	return FALSE;
2453 }
2454 
2455 /*
2456  * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2457  */
2458     char_u *
2459 skip_to_option_part(p)
2460     char_u  *p;
2461 {
2462     if (*p == ',')
2463 	++p;
2464     while (*p == ' ')
2465 	++p;
2466     return p;
2467 }
2468 
2469 /*
2470  * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2471  *
2472  * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2473  * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2474  */
2475     void
2476 changed()
2477 {
2478 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2479     /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2480      * mean a change of the buffer yet.  That is delayed until the
2481      * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2482     if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2483 	return;
2484     xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2485 #endif
2486 
2487     if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2488     {
2489 	int	save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2490 
2491 	/* Give a warning about changing a read-only file.  This may also
2492 	 * check-out the file, thus change "curbuf"! */
2493 	change_warning(0);
2494 
2495 	/* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2496 	 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2497 	if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2498 #ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2499 		&& !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2500 #endif
2501 		)
2502 	{
2503 	    ml_open_file(curbuf);
2504 
2505 	    /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2506 	     * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2507 	     * message.  Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2508 	     * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2509 	    if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2510 	    {
2511 		out_flush();
2512 		ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2513 		wait_return(TRUE);
2514 		msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2515 	    }
2516 	}
2517 	curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
2518 	ml_setflags(curbuf);
2519 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2520 	check_status(curbuf);
2521 	redraw_tabline = TRUE;
2522 #endif
2523 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2524 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2525 #endif
2526     }
2527     ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
2528 }
2529 
2530 static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2531 static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2532 static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2533 
2534 /*
2535  * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2536  * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2537  * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2538  * - invalidates cached values
2539  */
2540     void
2541 changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2542     linenr_T	lnum;
2543     colnr_T	col;
2544 {
2545     changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
2546     changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
2547 
2548 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2549     /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2550     if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2551     {
2552 	win_T	    *wp;
2553 	linenr_T    wlnum;
2554 
2555 	for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2556 	    if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2557 	    {
2558 		redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2559 		wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2560 		if (wlnum > 0)
2561 		    changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2562 	    }
2563     }
2564 #endif
2565 }
2566 
2567     static void
2568 changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2569     buf_T	*buf;
2570     linenr_T	lnum;
2571 {
2572     if (buf->b_mod_set)
2573     {
2574 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2575 	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2576 	    buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2577 	else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2578 	    buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2579     }
2580     else
2581     {
2582 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
2583 	buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2584 	buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2585 	buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2586 	buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
2587     }
2588 }
2589 
2590 /*
2591  * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2592  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2593  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2594  */
2595     void
2596 appended_lines(lnum, count)
2597     linenr_T	lnum;
2598     long	count;
2599 {
2600     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2601 }
2602 
2603 /*
2604  * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2605  */
2606     void
2607 appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2608     linenr_T	lnum;
2609     long	count;
2610 {
2611     mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2612     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2613 }
2614 
2615 /*
2616  * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2617  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2618  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2619  */
2620     void
2621 deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2622     linenr_T	lnum;
2623     long	count;
2624 {
2625     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2626 }
2627 
2628 /*
2629  * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2630  * Make sure the cursor is on a valid line before calling, a GUI callback may
2631  * be triggered to display the cursor.
2632  */
2633     void
2634 deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2635     linenr_T	lnum;
2636     long	count;
2637 {
2638     mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2639     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2640 }
2641 
2642 /*
2643  * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2644  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2645  * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2646  * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2647  * - invalidate cached values
2648  * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2649  * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2650  * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2651  * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2652  */
2653     void
2654 changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2655     linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2656     colnr_T	col;	    /* column in first line with change */
2657     linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2658     long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2659 {
2660     changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2661 
2662 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2663     if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2664     {
2665 	/* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2666 	 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2667 	 * displaying. */
2668 	win_T	    *wp;
2669 	linenr_T    wlnum;
2670 
2671 	for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2672 	    if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2673 	    {
2674 		redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2675 		wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2676 		if (wlnum > 0)
2677 		    changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2678 						    lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2679 	    }
2680     }
2681 #endif
2682 
2683     changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2684 }
2685 
2686     static void
2687 changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2688     buf_T	*buf;
2689     linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2690     linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2691     long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2692 {
2693     if (buf->b_mod_set)
2694     {
2695 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2696 	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2697 	    buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2698 	if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
2699 	{
2700 	    /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
2701 	    buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2702 	    if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2703 		buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
2704 	}
2705 	if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2706 	    buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2707 	buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
2708     }
2709     else
2710     {
2711 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed */
2712 	buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2713 	buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2714 	buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2715 	buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
2716     }
2717 }
2718 
2719     static void
2720 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2721     linenr_T	lnum;
2722     colnr_T	col;
2723     linenr_T	lnume;
2724     long	xtra;
2725 {
2726     win_T	*wp;
2727 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2728     tabpage_T	*tp;
2729 #endif
2730     int		i;
2731 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2732     int		cols;
2733     pos_T	*p;
2734     int		add;
2735 #endif
2736 
2737     /* mark the buffer as modified */
2738     changed();
2739 
2740     /* set the '. mark */
2741     if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2742     {
2743 	curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2744 	curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2745 
2746 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2747 	/* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2748 	 * don't have an entry yet. */
2749 	if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2750 	{
2751 	    if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2752 		add = TRUE;
2753 	    else
2754 	    {
2755 		/* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2756 		 * as the last one and the column is not too far away.  Avoids
2757 		 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2758 		p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2759 		if (p->lnum != lnum)
2760 		    add = TRUE;
2761 		else
2762 		{
2763 		    cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2764 		    if (cols == 0)
2765 			cols = 79;
2766 		    add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2767 		}
2768 	    }
2769 	    if (add)
2770 	    {
2771 		/* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2772 		 * and it's at some distance of the last change.  Use a new
2773 		 * position in the changelist. */
2774 		curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2775 
2776 		if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2777 		{
2778 		    /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2779 		    curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2780 		    mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2781 					  sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2782 		    FOR_ALL_TAB_WINDOWS(tp, wp)
2783 		    {
2784 			/* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2785 			 * this buffer. */
2786 			if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2787 			    --wp->w_changelistidx;
2788 		    }
2789 		}
2790 		FOR_ALL_TAB_WINDOWS(tp, wp)
2791 		{
2792 		    /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2793 		     * at the end it stays at the end. */
2794 		    if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2795 			    && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2796 			++wp->w_changelistidx;
2797 		}
2798 		++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2799 	    }
2800 	}
2801 	curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2802 							curbuf->b_last_change;
2803 	/* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2804 	 * takes you back to it. */
2805 	curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2806 #endif
2807     }
2808 
2809     FOR_ALL_TAB_WINDOWS(tp, wp)
2810     {
2811 	if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2812 	{
2813 	    /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2814 	    if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2815 		wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2816 
2817 	    /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2818 	     * values for the cursor. */
2819 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2820 	    /*
2821 	     * Update the folds for this window.  Can't postpone this, because
2822 	     * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2823 	     */
2824 	    foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2825 
2826 	    /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2827 	     * included in a fold.  Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2828 	     * might be displayed differently.
2829 	     * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2830 	     * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2831 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2832 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2833 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2834 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2835 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2836 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2837 
2838 	    /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2839 	     * compare with the first line in that range. */
2840 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2841 	    {
2842 		i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2843 		if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2844 		    changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2845 	    }
2846 #endif
2847 
2848 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2849 		changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2850 	    else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2851 		changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2852 	    if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2853 	    {
2854 		/* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2855 		 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2856 		approximate_botline_win(wp);
2857 	    }
2858 
2859 	    /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2860 	     * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2861 	     * inserted/deleted lines.  Makes it possible to stop displaying
2862 	     * after the change. */
2863 	    for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2864 		if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2865 		{
2866 		    if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2867 		    {
2868 			if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2869 			{
2870 			    /* line included in change */
2871 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2872 			}
2873 			else if (xtra != 0)
2874 			{
2875 			    /* line below change */
2876 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2877 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2878 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2879 #endif
2880 			}
2881 		    }
2882 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2883 		    else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2884 		    {
2885 			/* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2886 			 * may need to be redrawn */
2887 			wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2888 		    }
2889 #endif
2890 		}
2891 
2892 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2893 	    /* Take care of side effects for setting w_topline when folds have
2894 	     * changed.  Esp. when the buffer was changed in another window. */
2895 	    if (hasAnyFolding(wp))
2896 		set_topline(wp, wp->w_topline);
2897 #endif
2898 	}
2899     }
2900 
2901     /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2902      * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2903     if (must_redraw < VALID)
2904 	must_redraw = VALID;
2905 
2906 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2907     /* when the cursor line is changed always trigger CursorMoved */
2908     if (lnum <= curwin->w_cursor.lnum
2909 		 && lnume + (xtra < 0 ? -xtra : xtra) > curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
2910 	last_cursormoved.lnum = 0;
2911 #endif
2912 }
2913 
2914 /*
2915  * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2916  */
2917     void
2918 unchanged(buf, ff)
2919     buf_T	*buf;
2920     int		ff;	/* also reset 'fileformat' */
2921 {
2922     if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2923     {
2924 	buf->b_changed = 0;
2925 	ml_setflags(buf);
2926 	if (ff)
2927 	    save_file_ff(buf);
2928 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2929 	check_status(buf);
2930 	redraw_tabline = TRUE;
2931 #endif
2932 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2933 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2934 #endif
2935     }
2936     ++buf->b_changedtick;
2937 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2938     netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2939 #endif
2940 }
2941 
2942 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2943 /*
2944  * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2945  *		 need to be updated
2946  */
2947     void
2948 check_status(buf)
2949     buf_T	*buf;
2950 {
2951     win_T	*wp;
2952 
2953     for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2954 	if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2955 	{
2956 	    wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2957 	    if (must_redraw < VALID)
2958 		must_redraw = VALID;
2959 	}
2960 }
2961 #endif
2962 
2963 /*
2964  * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2965  * Don't do this for autocommands.
2966  * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2967  * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but "b_did_warn"
2968  * will be TRUE.
2969  */
2970     void
2971 change_warning(col)
2972     int	    col;		/* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2973 				   mode and 'showmode' is on */
2974 {
2975     static char *w_readonly = N_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file");
2976 
2977     if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2978 	    && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2979 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2980 	    && !autocmd_busy
2981 #endif
2982 	    && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2983     {
2984 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2985 	++curbuf_lock;
2986 	apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2987 	--curbuf_lock;
2988 	if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2989 	    return;
2990 #endif
2991 	/*
2992 	 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2993 	 * be after the mode message.
2994 	 */
2995 	msg_start();
2996 	if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2997 	    msg_col = col;
2998 	msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
2999 	MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_(w_readonly), hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
3000 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL
3001 	set_vim_var_string(VV_WARNINGMSG, (char_u *)_(w_readonly), -1);
3002 #endif
3003 	msg_clr_eos();
3004 	(void)msg_end();
3005 	if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
3006 	{
3007 	    out_flush();
3008 	    ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
3009 	}
3010 	curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
3011 	redraw_cmdline = FALSE;	/* don't redraw and erase the message */
3012 	if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
3013 	    showmode();
3014     }
3015 }
3016 
3017 /*
3018  * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
3019  * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
3020  * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
3021  * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
3022  * from any buffers but directly from the user.
3023  *
3024  * return the 'y' or 'n'
3025  */
3026     int
3027 ask_yesno(str, direct)
3028     char_u  *str;
3029     int	    direct;
3030 {
3031     int	    r = ' ';
3032     int	    save_State = State;
3033 
3034     if (exiting)		/* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
3035 	settmode(TMODE_RAW);
3036     ++no_wait_return;
3037 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3038     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
3039 #endif
3040     State = CONFIRM;		/* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
3041 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3042     setmouse();			/* disables mouse for xterm */
3043 #endif
3044     ++no_mapping;
3045     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3046 
3047     while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
3048     {
3049 	/* same highlighting as for wait_return */
3050 	smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
3051 	if (direct)
3052 	    r = get_keystroke();
3053 	else
3054 	    r = plain_vgetc();
3055 	if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
3056 	    r = 'n';
3057 	msg_putchar(r);	    /* show what you typed */
3058 	out_flush();
3059     }
3060     --no_wait_return;
3061     State = save_State;
3062 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3063     setmouse();
3064 #endif
3065     --no_mapping;
3066     --allow_keys;
3067 
3068     return r;
3069 }
3070 
3071 /*
3072  * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
3073  * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
3074  * button (used at the more prompt).
3075  * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
3076  * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
3077  * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
3078  */
3079     int
3080 get_keystroke()
3081 {
3082 #define CBUFLEN 151
3083     char_u	buf[CBUFLEN];
3084     int		len = 0;
3085     int		n;
3086     int		save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
3087     int		waited = 0;
3088 
3089     mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE;	/* mappings are not used here */
3090     for (;;)
3091     {
3092 	cursor_on();
3093 	out_flush();
3094 
3095 	/* First time: blocking wait.  Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3096 	 * terminal code to complete.  Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3097 	 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL).  And
3098 	 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3099 	n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3100 						    len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3101 	if (n > 0)
3102 	{
3103 	    /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3104 	    n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3105 	    len += n;
3106 	    waited = 0;
3107 	}
3108 	else if (len > 0)
3109 	    ++waited;	    /* keep track of the waiting time */
3110 
3111 	/* Incomplete termcode and not timed out yet: get more characters */
3112 	if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0
3113 	       && (!p_ttimeout || waited * 100L < (p_ttm < 0 ? p_tm : p_ttm)))
3114 	    continue;
3115 
3116 	/* found a termcode: adjust length */
3117 	if (n > 0)
3118 	    len = n;
3119 	if (len == 0)	    /* nothing typed yet */
3120 	    continue;
3121 
3122 	/* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3123 	n = buf[0];
3124 	if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3125 	{
3126 	    n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3127 	    if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3128 		    || n == K_IGNORE
3129 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3130 		    || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3131 		    || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3132 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3133 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3134 		    || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3135 		    || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3136 		    || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3137 		    || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3138 		    || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3139 		    || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3140 		    || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3141 		    || n == K_MOUSEUP
3142 		    || n == K_X1MOUSE
3143 		    || n == K_X1DRAG
3144 		    || n == K_X1RELEASE
3145 		    || n == K_X2MOUSE
3146 		    || n == K_X2DRAG
3147 		    || n == K_X2RELEASE
3148 # ifdef FEAT_GUI
3149 		    || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3150 		    || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3151 # endif
3152 #endif
3153 	       )
3154 	    {
3155 		if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3156 		    mod_mask = buf[2];
3157 		len -= 3;
3158 		if (len > 0)
3159 		    mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3160 		continue;
3161 	    }
3162 	    break;
3163 	}
3164 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3165 	if (has_mbyte)
3166 	{
3167 	    if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3168 		continue;	/* more bytes to get */
3169 	    buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3170 	    n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3171 	}
3172 #endif
3173 #ifdef UNIX
3174 	if (n == intr_char)
3175 	    n = ESC;
3176 #endif
3177 	break;
3178     }
3179 
3180     mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3181     return n;
3182 }
3183 
3184 /*
3185  * Get a number from the user.
3186  * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse.
3187  */
3188     int
3189 get_number(colon, mouse_used)
3190     int	    colon;			/* allow colon to abort */
3191     int	    *mouse_used;
3192 {
3193     int	n = 0;
3194     int	c;
3195     int typed = 0;
3196 
3197     if (mouse_used != NULL)
3198 	*mouse_used = FALSE;
3199 
3200     /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3201      * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3202     if (msg_silent != 0)
3203 	return 0;
3204 
3205 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3206     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
3207 #endif
3208     ++no_mapping;
3209     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3210     for (;;)
3211     {
3212 	windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3213 	c = safe_vgetc();
3214 	if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3215 	{
3216 	    n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3217 	    msg_putchar(c);
3218 	    ++typed;
3219 	}
3220 	else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3221 	{
3222 	    if (typed > 0)
3223 	    {
3224 		MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3225 		--typed;
3226 	    }
3227 	    n /= 10;
3228 	}
3229 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3230 	else if (mouse_used != NULL && c == K_LEFTMOUSE)
3231 	{
3232 	    *mouse_used = TRUE;
3233 	    n = mouse_row + 1;
3234 	    break;
3235 	}
3236 #endif
3237 	else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3238 	{
3239 	    stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3240 	    if (!exmode_active)
3241 		cmdline_row = msg_row;
3242 	    skip_redraw = TRUE;	    /* skip redraw once */
3243 	    do_redraw = FALSE;
3244 	    break;
3245 	}
3246 	else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3247 	    break;
3248     }
3249     --no_mapping;
3250     --allow_keys;
3251     return n;
3252 }
3253 
3254 /*
3255  * Ask the user to enter a number.
3256  * When "mouse_used" is not NULL allow using the mouse and in that case return
3257  * the line number.
3258  */
3259     int
3260 prompt_for_number(mouse_used)
3261     int		*mouse_used;
3262 {
3263     int		i;
3264     int		save_cmdline_row;
3265     int		save_State;
3266 
3267     /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
3268     if (mouse_used != NULL)
3269 	MSG_PUTS(_("Type number and <Enter> or click with mouse (empty cancels): "));
3270     else
3271 	MSG_PUTS(_("Type number and <Enter> (empty cancels): "));
3272 
3273     /* Set the state such that text can be selected/copied/pasted and we still
3274      * get mouse events. */
3275     save_cmdline_row = cmdline_row;
3276     cmdline_row = 0;
3277     save_State = State;
3278     State = CMDLINE;
3279 
3280     i = get_number(TRUE, mouse_used);
3281     if (KeyTyped)
3282     {
3283 	/* don't call wait_return() now */
3284 	/* msg_putchar('\n'); */
3285 	cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
3286 	need_wait_return = FALSE;
3287 	msg_didany = FALSE;
3288 	msg_didout = FALSE;
3289     }
3290     else
3291 	cmdline_row = save_cmdline_row;
3292     State = save_State;
3293 
3294     return i;
3295 }
3296 
3297     void
3298 msgmore(n)
3299     long n;
3300 {
3301     long pn;
3302 
3303     if (global_busy	    /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
3304 	    || !messaging())  /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3305 	return;
3306 
3307     /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3308      * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3309      * then "put" reports the last action. */
3310     if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3311 	return;
3312 
3313     if (n > 0)
3314 	pn = n;
3315     else
3316 	pn = -n;
3317 
3318     if (pn > p_report)
3319     {
3320 	if (pn == 1)
3321 	{
3322 	    if (n > 0)
3323 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3324 	    else
3325 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3326 	}
3327 	else
3328 	{
3329 	    if (n > 0)
3330 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3331 	    else
3332 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3333 	}
3334 	if (got_int)
3335 	    STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3336 	if (msg(msg_buf))
3337 	{
3338 	    set_keep_msg(msg_buf, 0);
3339 	    keep_msg_more = TRUE;
3340 	}
3341     }
3342 }
3343 
3344 /*
3345  * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3346  */
3347     void
3348 beep_flush()
3349 {
3350     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3351     {
3352 	flush_buffers(FALSE);
3353 	vim_beep();
3354     }
3355 }
3356 
3357 /*
3358  * give a warning for an error
3359  */
3360     void
3361 vim_beep()
3362 {
3363     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3364     {
3365 	if (p_vb
3366 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
3367 		/* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3368 		 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3369 		&& !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3370 #endif
3371 		)
3372 	{
3373 	    out_str(T_VB);
3374 	}
3375 	else
3376 	{
3377 #ifdef MSDOS
3378 	    /*
3379 	     * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3380 	     * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3381 	     * where the beeps don't overlap.
3382 	     */
3383 	    if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3384 	    {
3385 		out_char(BELL);
3386 		beep_count = 1;
3387 	    }
3388 	    else
3389 		++beep_count;
3390 #else
3391 	    out_char(BELL);
3392 #endif
3393 	}
3394 
3395 	/* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3396 	 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3397 	if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3398 	{
3399 	    msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3400 	    msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3401 	}
3402     }
3403 }
3404 
3405 /*
3406  * To get the "real" home directory:
3407  * - get value of $HOME
3408  * For Unix:
3409  *  - go to that directory
3410  *  - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3411  *  This also works with mounts and links.
3412  *  Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3413  */
3414 static char_u	*homedir = NULL;
3415 
3416     void
3417 init_homedir()
3418 {
3419     char_u  *var;
3420 
3421     /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3422     vim_free(homedir);
3423     homedir = NULL;
3424 
3425 #ifdef VMS
3426     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3427 #else
3428     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3429 #endif
3430 
3431     if (var != NULL && *var == NUL)	/* empty is same as not set */
3432 	var = NULL;
3433 
3434 #ifdef WIN3264
3435     /*
3436      * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3437      * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%".  Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3438      * when $HOME is being set.
3439      */
3440     if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3441     {
3442 	char_u	*p;
3443 	char_u	*exp;
3444 
3445 	p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3446 	if (p != NULL)
3447 	{
3448 	    vim_strncpy(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3449 	    exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3450 	    if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3451 					&& STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3452 	    {
3453 		vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
3454 		var = NameBuff;
3455 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3456 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3457 	    }
3458 	}
3459     }
3460 
3461     /*
3462      * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3463      * specifically defined it for Vim's sake.  However, on Windows NT
3464      * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3465      * each user.  Try constructing $HOME from these.
3466      */
3467     if (var == NULL)
3468     {
3469 	char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3470 
3471 	homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3472 	homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3473 	if (homepath == NULL || *homepath == NUL)
3474 	    homepath = "\\";
3475 	if (homedrive != NULL
3476 			   && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3477 	{
3478 	    sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3479 	    if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3480 	    {
3481 		var = NameBuff;
3482 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3483 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3484 	    }
3485 	}
3486     }
3487 
3488 # if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3489     if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3490     {
3491 	int	len;
3492 	char_u  *pp;
3493 
3494 	/* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions are
3495 	 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3496 	acp_to_enc(var, (int)STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3497 	if (pp != NULL)
3498 	{
3499 	    homedir = pp;
3500 	    return;
3501 	}
3502     }
3503 # endif
3504 #endif
3505 
3506 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3507     /*
3508      * Default home dir is C:/
3509      * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3510      */
3511     if (var == NULL)
3512 	var = "C:/";
3513 #endif
3514     if (var != NULL)
3515     {
3516 #ifdef UNIX
3517 	/*
3518 	 * Change to the directory and get the actual path.  This resolves
3519 	 * links.  Don't do it when we can't return.
3520 	 */
3521 	if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3522 					  && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3523 	{
3524 	    if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3525 		var = IObuff;
3526 	    if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3527 		EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3528 	}
3529 #endif
3530 	homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3531     }
3532 }
3533 
3534 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
3535     void
3536 free_homedir()
3537 {
3538     vim_free(homedir);
3539 }
3540 #endif
3541 
3542 /*
3543  * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
3544  * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
3545  * again soon.
3546  */
3547     char_u *
3548 expand_env_save(src)
3549     char_u	*src;
3550 {
3551     return expand_env_save_opt(src, FALSE);
3552 }
3553 
3554 /*
3555  * Idem, but when "one" is TRUE handle the string as one file name, only
3556  * expand "~" at the start.
3557  */
3558     char_u *
3559 expand_env_save_opt(src, one)
3560     char_u	*src;
3561     int		one;
3562 {
3563     char_u	*p;
3564 
3565     p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
3566     if (p != NULL)
3567 	expand_env_esc(src, p, MAXPATHL, FALSE, one, NULL);
3568     return p;
3569 }
3570 
3571 /*
3572  * Expand environment variable with path name.
3573  * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME.	For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3574  * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$" (not for Win32 though).
3575  * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3576  */
3577     void
3578 expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3579     char_u	*src;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3580     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3581     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3582 {
3583     expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE, FALSE, NULL);
3584 }
3585 
3586     void
3587 expand_env_esc(srcp, dst, dstlen, esc, one, startstr)
3588     char_u	*srcp;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3589     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3590     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3591     int		esc;		/* escape spaces in expanded variables */
3592     int		one;		/* "srcp" is one file name */
3593     char_u	*startstr;	/* start again after this (can be NULL) */
3594 {
3595     char_u	*src;
3596     char_u	*tail;
3597     int		c;
3598     char_u	*var;
3599     int		copy_char;
3600     int		mustfree;	/* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3601     int		at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
3602     int		startstr_len = 0;
3603 
3604     if (startstr != NULL)
3605 	startstr_len = (int)STRLEN(startstr);
3606 
3607     src = skipwhite(srcp);
3608     --dstlen;		    /* leave one char space for "\," */
3609     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3610     {
3611 	copy_char = TRUE;
3612 	if ((*src == '$'
3613 #ifdef VMS
3614 		    && at_start
3615 #endif
3616 	   )
3617 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3618 		|| *src == '%'
3619 #endif
3620 		|| (*src == '~' && at_start))
3621 	{
3622 	    mustfree = FALSE;
3623 
3624 	    /*
3625 	     * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3626 	     * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3627 	     */
3628 	    if (*src != '~')				/* environment var */
3629 	    {
3630 		tail = src + 1;
3631 		var = dst;
3632 		c = dstlen - 1;
3633 
3634 #ifdef UNIX
3635 		/* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3636 		if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3637 		{
3638 		    tail++;	/* ignore '{' */
3639 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3640 			*var++ = *tail++;
3641 		}
3642 		else
3643 #endif
3644 		{
3645 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3646 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3647 			    || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3648 #endif
3649 			    ))
3650 		    {
3651 #ifdef OS2		/* env vars only in uppercase */
3652 			*var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3653 			tail++;	    /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3654 #else
3655 			*var++ = *tail++;
3656 #endif
3657 		    }
3658 		}
3659 
3660 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3661 # ifdef UNIX
3662 		if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3663 # else
3664 		if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3665 # endif
3666 		    var = NULL;
3667 		else
3668 		{
3669 # ifdef UNIX
3670 		    if (src[1] == '{')
3671 # else
3672 		    if (*src == '%')
3673 #endif
3674 			++tail;
3675 #endif
3676 		    *var = NUL;
3677 		    var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3678 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3679 		}
3680 #endif
3681 	    }
3682 							/* home directory */
3683 	    else if (  src[1] == NUL
3684 		    || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3685 		    || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3686 	    {
3687 		var = homedir;
3688 		tail = src + 1;
3689 	    }
3690 	    else					/* user directory */
3691 	    {
3692 #if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3693 		/*
3694 		 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3695 		 */
3696 		tail = src;
3697 		var = dst;
3698 		c = dstlen - 1;
3699 		while (	   c-- > 0
3700 			&& *tail
3701 			&& vim_isfilec(*tail)
3702 			&& !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3703 		    *var++ = *tail++;
3704 		*var = NUL;
3705 # ifdef UNIX
3706 		/*
3707 		 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3708 		 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3709 		 * expand ~user.  This is slower and may fail if the shell
3710 		 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3711 		 */
3712 #  if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3713 		{
3714 		    struct passwd *pw;
3715 
3716 		    /* Note: memory allocated by getpwnam() is never freed.
3717 		     * Calling endpwent() apparently doesn't help. */
3718 		    pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3719 		    if (pw != NULL)
3720 			var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3721 		    else
3722 			var = NULL;
3723 		}
3724 		if (var == NULL)
3725 #  endif
3726 		{
3727 		    expand_T	xpc;
3728 
3729 		    ExpandInit(&xpc);
3730 		    xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3731 		    var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3732 				WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3733 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3734 		}
3735 
3736 # else	/* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3737 		/*
3738 		 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3739 		 * directories to search for the user account in.
3740 		 */
3741 		{
3742 		    char_u	test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3743 		    char_u	*path, *next_path, *ptr;
3744 		    struct stat	st;
3745 
3746 		    STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3747 		    next_path = paths;
3748 		    while (*next_path)
3749 		    {
3750 			for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3751 				next_path++);
3752 			if (*next_path)
3753 			    *next_path++ = NUL;
3754 			STRCPY(test, path);
3755 			STRCAT(test, "/");
3756 			STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3757 			if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3758 			{
3759 			    var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3760 			    STRCPY(var, test);
3761 			    mustfree = TRUE;
3762 			    break;
3763 			}
3764 		    }
3765 		}
3766 # endif /* UNIX */
3767 #else
3768 		/* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3769 		var = NULL;
3770 		tail = (char_u *)"";	/* for gcc */
3771 #endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3772 	    }
3773 
3774 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3775 	    /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3776 	     * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3777 	    if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3778 	    {
3779 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave(var);
3780 
3781 		if (p != NULL)
3782 		{
3783 		    if (mustfree)
3784 			vim_free(var);
3785 		    var = p;
3786 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3787 		    forward_slash(var);
3788 		}
3789 	    }
3790 #endif
3791 
3792 	    /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3793 	     * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3794 	    if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3795 	    {
3796 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3797 
3798 		if (p != NULL)
3799 		{
3800 		    if (mustfree)
3801 			vim_free(var);
3802 		    var = p;
3803 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3804 		}
3805 	    }
3806 
3807 	    if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3808 		    && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3809 	    {
3810 		STRCPY(dst, var);
3811 		dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
3812 		c = (int)STRLEN(var);
3813 		/* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3814 		 * with it, skip a character */
3815 		if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
3816 #if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3817 			&& dst[-1] != ':'
3818 #endif
3819 			&& vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3820 		    ++tail;
3821 		dst += c;
3822 		src = tail;
3823 		copy_char = FALSE;
3824 	    }
3825 	    if (mustfree)
3826 		vim_free(var);
3827 	}
3828 
3829 	if (copy_char)	    /* copy at least one char */
3830 	{
3831 	    /*
3832 	     * Recognize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3833 	     * Don't do this when "one" is TRUE, to avoid expanding "~" in
3834 	     * ":edit foo ~ foo".
3835 	     */
3836 	    at_start = FALSE;
3837 	    if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3838 	    {
3839 		*dst++ = *src++;
3840 		--dstlen;
3841 	    }
3842 	    else if ((src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',') && !one)
3843 		at_start = TRUE;
3844 	    *dst++ = *src++;
3845 	    --dstlen;
3846 
3847 	    if (startstr != NULL && src - startstr_len >= srcp
3848 		    && STRNCMP(src - startstr_len, startstr, startstr_len) == 0)
3849 		at_start = TRUE;
3850 	}
3851     }
3852     *dst = NUL;
3853 }
3854 
3855 /*
3856  * Vim's version of getenv().
3857  * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
3858  * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
3859  */
3860     char_u *
3861 vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3862     char_u	*name;
3863     int		*mustfree;	/* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3864 {
3865     char_u	*p;
3866     char_u	*pend;
3867     int		vimruntime;
3868 
3869 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3870     /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3871     if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3872 	return homedir;
3873 #endif
3874 
3875     p = mch_getenv(name);
3876     if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3877 	p = NULL;
3878 
3879     if (p != NULL)
3880     {
3881 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3882 	if (enc_utf8)
3883 	{
3884 	    int	    len;
3885 	    char_u  *pp;
3886 
3887 	    /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions are
3888 	     * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3889 	    acp_to_enc(p, (int)STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3890 	    if (pp != NULL)
3891 	    {
3892 		p = pp;
3893 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3894 	    }
3895 	}
3896 #endif
3897 	return p;
3898     }
3899 
3900     vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3901     if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3902 	return NULL;
3903 
3904     /*
3905      * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3906      * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3907      */
3908     if (vimruntime
3909 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3910 	    && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3911 #endif
3912        )
3913     {
3914 	p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3915 	if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3916 	    p = NULL;
3917 	if (p != NULL)
3918 	{
3919 	    p = vim_version_dir(p);
3920 	    if (p != NULL)
3921 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3922 	    else
3923 		p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3924 
3925 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3926 	    if (enc_utf8)
3927 	    {
3928 		int	len;
3929 		char_u  *pp;
3930 
3931 		/* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8.  Other conversions
3932 		 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3933 		 * characters. */
3934 		acp_to_enc(p, (int)STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3935 		if (pp != NULL)
3936 		{
3937 		    if (mustfree)
3938 			vim_free(p);
3939 		    p = pp;
3940 		    *mustfree = TRUE;
3941 		}
3942 	    }
3943 #endif
3944 	}
3945     }
3946 
3947     /*
3948      * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3949      * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3950      * - the executable name from argv[0]
3951      */
3952     if (p == NULL)
3953     {
3954 	if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3955 	    p = p_hf;
3956 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3957 	/*
3958 	 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3959 	 */
3960 	else
3961 	    p = exe_name;
3962 #endif
3963 	if (p != NULL)
3964 	{
3965 	    /* remove the file name */
3966 	    pend = gettail(p);
3967 
3968 	    /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3969 	    if (p == p_hf)
3970 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3971 
3972 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3973 # ifdef MACOS_X
3974 	    /* remove "MacOS" from exe_name and add "Resources/vim" */
3975 	    if (p == exe_name)
3976 	    {
3977 		char_u	*pend1;
3978 		char_u	*pnew;
3979 
3980 		pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"MacOS");
3981 		if (pend1 != pend)
3982 		{
3983 		    pnew = alloc((unsigned)(pend1 - p) + 15);
3984 		    if (pnew != NULL)
3985 		    {
3986 			STRNCPY(pnew, p, (pend1 - p));
3987 			STRCPY(pnew + (pend1 - p), "Resources/vim");
3988 			p = pnew;
3989 			pend = p + STRLEN(p);
3990 		    }
3991 		}
3992 	    }
3993 # endif
3994 	    /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3995 	    if (p == exe_name)
3996 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3997 #endif
3998 
3999 	    /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
4000 	    if (!vimruntime)
4001 	    {
4002 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
4003 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
4004 	    }
4005 
4006 	    /* remove trailing path separator */
4007 #ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
4008 	    /* With MacOS path (with  colons) the final colon is required */
4009 	    /* to avoid confusion between absolute and relative path */
4010 	    if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
4011 		--pend;
4012 #endif
4013 
4014 #ifdef MACOS_X
4015 	    if (p == exe_name || p == p_hf)
4016 #endif
4017 		/* check that the result is a directory name */
4018 		p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
4019 
4020 	    if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
4021 	    {
4022 		vim_free(p);
4023 		p = NULL;
4024 	    }
4025 	    else
4026 	    {
4027 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
4028 		/* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
4029 		if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
4030 		{
4031 		    vim_free(p);
4032 		    p = pend;
4033 		}
4034 #endif
4035 		*mustfree = TRUE;
4036 	    }
4037 	}
4038     }
4039 
4040 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
4041     /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
4042      * default_vimruntime_dir */
4043     if (p == NULL)
4044     {
4045 	/* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
4046 	if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
4047 	{
4048 	    p = default_vimruntime_dir;
4049 	    *mustfree = FALSE;
4050 	}
4051 	else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
4052 	{
4053 	    if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
4054 		*mustfree = TRUE;
4055 	    else
4056 	    {
4057 		p = default_vim_dir;
4058 		*mustfree = FALSE;
4059 	    }
4060 	}
4061     }
4062 #endif
4063 
4064     /*
4065      * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
4066      * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
4067      */
4068     if (p != NULL)
4069     {
4070 	if (vimruntime)
4071 	{
4072 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
4073 	    didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
4074 #ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
4075 	    {
4076 		char_u	*buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
4077 
4078 		if (buf != NULL)
4079 		{
4080 		    bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
4081 		    vim_free(buf);
4082 		}
4083 	    }
4084 #endif
4085 	}
4086 	else
4087 	{
4088 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
4089 	    didset_vim = TRUE;
4090 	}
4091     }
4092     return p;
4093 }
4094 
4095 /*
4096  * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
4097  * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
4098  */
4099     static char_u *
4100 vim_version_dir(vimdir)
4101     char_u	*vimdir;
4102 {
4103     char_u	*p;
4104 
4105     if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
4106 	return NULL;
4107     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
4108     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
4109 	return p;
4110     vim_free(p);
4111     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
4112     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
4113 	return p;
4114     vim_free(p);
4115     return NULL;
4116 }
4117 
4118 /*
4119  * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
4120  * the length of "name/".  Otherwise return "pend".
4121  */
4122     static char_u *
4123 remove_tail(p, pend, name)
4124     char_u	*p;
4125     char_u	*pend;
4126     char_u	*name;
4127 {
4128     int		len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
4129     char_u	*newend = pend - len;
4130 
4131     if (newend >= p
4132 	    && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
4133 	    && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
4134 	return newend;
4135     return pend;
4136 }
4137 
4138 /*
4139  * Our portable version of setenv.
4140  */
4141     void
4142 vim_setenv(name, val)
4143     char_u	*name;
4144     char_u	*val;
4145 {
4146 #ifdef HAVE_SETENV
4147     mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
4148 #else
4149     char_u	*envbuf;
4150 
4151     /*
4152      * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
4153      * valid.  The allocated memory will never be freed.
4154      */
4155     envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
4156     if (envbuf != NULL)
4157     {
4158 	sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
4159 	putenv((char *)envbuf);
4160     }
4161 #endif
4162 }
4163 
4164 #if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
4165 /*
4166  * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
4167  */
4168     char_u *
4169 get_env_name(xp, idx)
4170     expand_T	*xp UNUSED;
4171     int		idx;
4172 {
4173 # if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
4174     /*
4175      * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4176      */
4177     return NULL;
4178 # else
4179 # ifndef __WIN32__
4180     /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4181     extern char		**environ;
4182 # endif
4183 # define ENVNAMELEN 100
4184     static char_u	name[ENVNAMELEN];
4185     char_u		*str;
4186     int			n;
4187 
4188     str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4189     if (str == NULL)
4190 	return NULL;
4191 
4192     for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
4193     {
4194 	if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4195 	    break;
4196 	name[n] = str[n];
4197     }
4198     name[n] = NUL;
4199     return name;
4200 # endif
4201 }
4202 #endif
4203 
4204 /*
4205  * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4206  * 'src'.
4207  * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4208  */
4209     void
4210 home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4211     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
4212     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
4213     char_u	*dst;	/* where to put the result */
4214     int		dstlen;	/* maximum length of the result */
4215     int		one;	/* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4216 			   spaces and commas in the file name. */
4217 {
4218     size_t	dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4219     size_t	len;
4220     char_u	*homedir_env;
4221     char_u	*p;
4222 
4223     if (src == NULL)
4224     {
4225 	*dst = NUL;
4226 	return;
4227     }
4228 
4229     /*
4230      * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4231      */
4232     if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4233     {
4234 	STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4235 	return;
4236     }
4237 
4238     /*
4239      * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4240      * "real" home directory.
4241      */
4242     if (homedir != NULL)
4243 	dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4244 
4245 #ifdef VMS
4246     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4247 #else
4248     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4249 #endif
4250 
4251     if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4252 	homedir_env = NULL;
4253     if (homedir_env != NULL)
4254 	envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4255 
4256     if (!one)
4257 	src = skipwhite(src);
4258     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4259     {
4260 	/*
4261 	 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4262 	 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4263 	 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4264 	 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4265 	 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4266 	 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4267 	 * er's home directory)).
4268 	 */
4269 	p = homedir;
4270 	len = dirlen;
4271 	for (;;)
4272 	{
4273 	    if (   len
4274 		&& fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4275 		&& (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4276 		    || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4277 		    || src[len] == NUL))
4278 	    {
4279 		src += len;
4280 		if (--dstlen > 0)
4281 		    *dst++ = '~';
4282 
4283 		/*
4284 		 * If it's just the home directory, add  "/".
4285 		 */
4286 		if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4287 		    *dst++ = '/';
4288 		break;
4289 	    }
4290 	    if (p == homedir_env)
4291 		break;
4292 	    p = homedir_env;
4293 	    len = envlen;
4294 	}
4295 
4296 	/* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4297 	while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4298 	    *dst++ = *src++;
4299 	/* skip separator */
4300 	while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4301 	    *dst++ = *src++;
4302     }
4303     /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4304 
4305     *dst = NUL;
4306 }
4307 
4308 /*
4309  * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4310  * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4311  */
4312     char_u  *
4313 home_replace_save(buf, src)
4314     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
4315     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
4316 {
4317     char_u	*dst;
4318     unsigned	len;
4319 
4320     len = 3;			/* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4321     if (src != NULL)		/* just in case */
4322 	len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4323     dst = alloc(len);
4324     if (dst != NULL)
4325 	home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4326     return dst;
4327 }
4328 
4329 /*
4330  * Compare two file names and return:
4331  * FPC_SAME   if they both exist and are the same file.
4332  * FPC_SAMEX  if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4333  * FPC_DIFF   if they both exist and are different files.
4334  * FPC_NOTX   if they both don't exist.
4335  * FPC_DIFFX  if one of them doesn't exist.
4336  * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4337  */
4338     int
4339 fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4340     char_u *s1, *s2;
4341     int	    checkname;		/* when both don't exist, check file names */
4342 {
4343 #ifdef UNIX
4344     char_u	    exp1[MAXPATHL];
4345     char_u	    full1[MAXPATHL];
4346     char_u	    full2[MAXPATHL];
4347     struct stat	    st1, st2;
4348     int		    r1, r2;
4349 
4350     expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4351     r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4352     r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4353     if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4354     {
4355 	/* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4356 	if (checkname)
4357 	{
4358 	    if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4359 		return FPC_SAMEX;
4360 	    r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4361 	    r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4362 	    if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4363 		return FPC_SAMEX;
4364 	}
4365 	return FPC_NOTX;
4366     }
4367     if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4368 	return FPC_DIFFX;
4369     if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4370 	return FPC_SAME;
4371     return FPC_DIFF;
4372 #else
4373     char_u  *exp1;		/* expanded s1 */
4374     char_u  *full1;		/* full path of s1 */
4375     char_u  *full2;		/* full path of s2 */
4376     int	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4377     int	    r1, r2;
4378 
4379     /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4380     if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4381     {
4382 	full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4383 	full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4384 
4385 	expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4386 	r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4387 	r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4388 
4389 	/* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4390 	if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4391 	{
4392 	    if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4393 		retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4394 	    else
4395 		retval = FPC_NOTX;
4396 	}
4397 	else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4398 	    retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4399 	else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4400 	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4401 	else
4402 	    retval = FPC_SAME;
4403 	vim_free(exp1);
4404     }
4405     return retval;
4406 #endif
4407 }
4408 
4409 /*
4410  * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4411  * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
4412  */
4413     char_u *
4414 gettail(fname)
4415     char_u *fname;
4416 {
4417     char_u  *p1, *p2;
4418 
4419     if (fname == NULL)
4420 	return (char_u *)"";
4421     for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; )	/* find last part of path */
4422     {
4423 	if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4424 	    p1 = p2 + 1;
4425 	mb_ptr_adv(p2);
4426     }
4427     return p1;
4428 }
4429 
4430 /*
4431  * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators.  Putting a NUL
4432  * here leaves the directory name.  Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4433  * Always returns a valid pointer.
4434  */
4435     char_u *
4436 gettail_sep(fname)
4437     char_u	*fname;
4438 {
4439     char_u	*p;
4440     char_u	*t;
4441 
4442     p = get_past_head(fname);	/* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4443     t = gettail(fname);
4444     while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4445 	--t;
4446 #ifdef VMS
4447     /* path separator is part of the path */
4448     ++t;
4449 #endif
4450     return t;
4451 }
4452 
4453 /*
4454  * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4455  */
4456     char_u *
4457 getnextcomp(fname)
4458     char_u *fname;
4459 {
4460     while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
4461 	mb_ptr_adv(fname);
4462     if (*fname)
4463 	++fname;
4464     return fname;
4465 }
4466 
4467 /*
4468  * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4469  * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4470  * If there is no head, path is returned.
4471  */
4472     char_u *
4473 get_past_head(path)
4474     char_u  *path;
4475 {
4476     char_u  *retval;
4477 
4478 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4479     /* may skip "c:" */
4480     if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4481 	retval = path + 2;
4482     else
4483 	retval = path;
4484 #else
4485 # if defined(AMIGA)
4486     /* may skip "label:" */
4487     retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4488     if (retval == NULL)
4489 	retval = path;
4490 # else	/* Unix */
4491     retval = path;
4492 # endif
4493 #endif
4494 
4495     while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4496 	++retval;
4497 
4498     return retval;
4499 }
4500 
4501 /*
4502  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4503  */
4504     int
4505 vim_ispathsep(c)
4506     int c;
4507 {
4508 #ifdef RISCOS
4509     return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4510 #else
4511 # ifdef UNIX
4512     return (c == '/');	    /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4513 # else
4514 #  ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4515     return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4516 #  else
4517 #   ifdef VMS
4518     /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4519     return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4520 	    || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4521 #   else		/* Amiga */
4522     return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4523 #   endif /* VMS */
4524 #  endif
4525 # endif
4526 #endif /* RISC OS */
4527 }
4528 
4529 #if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4530 /*
4531  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4532  */
4533     int
4534 vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4535     int c;
4536 {
4537 #ifdef UNIX
4538     return (c == ':');
4539 #else
4540     return (c == ';');	/* might not be right for every system... */
4541 #endif
4542 }
4543 #endif
4544 
4545 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) \
4546 	|| defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
4547 /*
4548  * Shorten the path of a file from "~/foo/../.bar/fname" to "~/f/../.b/fname"
4549  * It's done in-place.
4550  */
4551     void
4552 shorten_dir(str)
4553     char_u *str;
4554 {
4555     char_u	*tail, *s, *d;
4556     int		skip = FALSE;
4557 
4558     tail = gettail(str);
4559     d = str;
4560     for (s = str; ; ++s)
4561     {
4562 	if (s >= tail)		    /* copy the whole tail */
4563 	{
4564 	    *d++ = *s;
4565 	    if (*s == NUL)
4566 		break;
4567 	}
4568 	else if (vim_ispathsep(*s))	    /* copy '/' and next char */
4569 	{
4570 	    *d++ = *s;
4571 	    skip = FALSE;
4572 	}
4573 	else if (!skip)
4574 	{
4575 	    *d++ = *s;		    /* copy next char */
4576 	    if (*s != '~' && *s != '.') /* and leading "~" and "." */
4577 		skip = TRUE;
4578 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
4579 	    if (has_mbyte)
4580 	    {
4581 		int l = mb_ptr2len(s);
4582 
4583 		while (--l > 0)
4584 		    *d++ = *++s;
4585 	    }
4586 # endif
4587 	}
4588     }
4589 }
4590 #endif
4591 
4592 /*
4593  * Return TRUE if the directory of "fname" exists, FALSE otherwise.
4594  * Also returns TRUE if there is no directory name.
4595  * "fname" must be writable!.
4596  */
4597     int
4598 dir_of_file_exists(fname)
4599     char_u	*fname;
4600 {
4601     char_u	*p;
4602     int		c;
4603     int		retval;
4604 
4605     p = gettail_sep(fname);
4606     if (p == fname)
4607 	return TRUE;
4608     c = *p;
4609     *p = NUL;
4610     retval = mch_isdir(fname);
4611     *p = c;
4612     return retval;
4613 }
4614 
4615 #if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4616 	|| defined(PROTO)
4617 /*
4618  * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4619  */
4620     int
4621 vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4622     char_u	*x, *y;
4623 {
4624     return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4625 }
4626 
4627     int
4628 vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4629     char_u	*x, *y;
4630     size_t	len;
4631 {
4632     while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4633     {
4634 	if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4635 		&& !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4636 		&& !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4637 	    break;
4638 	++x;
4639 	++y;
4640 	--len;
4641     }
4642     if (len == 0)
4643 	return 0;
4644     return (*x - *y);
4645 }
4646 #endif
4647 
4648 /*
4649  * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4650  * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is necessary.
4651  */
4652     char_u  *
4653 concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4654     char_u  *fname1;
4655     char_u  *fname2;
4656     int	    sep;
4657 {
4658     char_u  *dest;
4659 
4660     dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4661     if (dest != NULL)
4662     {
4663 	STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4664 	if (sep)
4665 	    add_pathsep(dest);
4666 	STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4667     }
4668     return dest;
4669 }
4670 
4671 /*
4672  * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4673  * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4674  */
4675     char_u  *
4676 concat_str(str1, str2)
4677     char_u  *str1;
4678     char_u  *str2;
4679 {
4680     char_u  *dest;
4681     size_t  l = STRLEN(str1);
4682 
4683     dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4684     if (dest != NULL)
4685     {
4686 	STRCPY(dest, str1);
4687 	STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4688     }
4689     return dest;
4690 }
4691 
4692 /*
4693  * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4694  * separator.
4695  */
4696     void
4697 add_pathsep(p)
4698     char_u	*p;
4699 {
4700     if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
4701 	STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4702 }
4703 
4704 /*
4705  * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4706  * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4707  */
4708     char_u  *
4709 FullName_save(fname, force)
4710     char_u	*fname;
4711     int		force;	    /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4712 			       like a full path name */
4713 {
4714     char_u	*buf;
4715     char_u	*new_fname = NULL;
4716 
4717     if (fname == NULL)
4718 	return NULL;
4719 
4720     buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4721     if (buf != NULL)
4722     {
4723 	if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4724 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4725 	else
4726 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4727 	vim_free(buf);
4728     }
4729     return new_fname;
4730 }
4731 
4732 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4733 
4734 static char_u	*skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4735 
4736 /*
4737  * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4738  * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4739  */
4740     pos_T *
4741 find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
4742     int		ind_maxcomment;
4743 {
4744     pos_T	*pos;
4745     char_u	*line;
4746     char_u	*p;
4747     int		cur_maxcomment = ind_maxcomment;
4748 
4749     for (;;)
4750     {
4751 	pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, cur_maxcomment);
4752 	if (pos == NULL)
4753 	    break;
4754 
4755 	/*
4756 	 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4757 	 * If it is then restrict the search to below this line and try again.
4758 	 */
4759 	line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4760 	for (p = line; *p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4761 	    p = skip_string(p);
4762 	if ((colnr_T)(p - line) <= pos->col)
4763 	    break;
4764 	cur_maxcomment = curwin->w_cursor.lnum - pos->lnum - 1;
4765 	if (cur_maxcomment <= 0)
4766 	{
4767 	    pos = NULL;
4768 	    break;
4769 	}
4770     }
4771     return pos;
4772 }
4773 
4774 /*
4775  * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4776  * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4777  */
4778     static char_u *
4779 skip_string(p)
4780     char_u  *p;
4781 {
4782     int	    i;
4783 
4784     /*
4785      * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4786      */
4787     for ( ; ; ++p)
4788     {
4789 	if (p[0] == '\'')		    /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4790 	{
4791 	    if (!p[1])			    /* ' at end of line */
4792 		break;
4793 	    i = 2;
4794 	    if (p[1] == '\\')		    /* '\n' or '\000' */
4795 	    {
4796 		++i;
4797 		while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1]))   /* '\000' */
4798 		    ++i;
4799 	    }
4800 	    if (p[i] == '\'')		    /* check for trailing ' */
4801 	    {
4802 		p += i;
4803 		continue;
4804 	    }
4805 	}
4806 	else if (p[0] == '"')		    /* start of string */
4807 	{
4808 	    for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4809 	    {
4810 		if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4811 		    ++p;
4812 		else if (p[0] == '"')	    /* end of string */
4813 		    break;
4814 	    }
4815 	    if (p[0] == '"')
4816 		continue;
4817 	}
4818 	break;				    /* no string found */
4819     }
4820     if (!*p)
4821 	--p;				    /* backup from NUL */
4822     return p;
4823 }
4824 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4825 
4826 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4827 
4828 /*
4829  * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4830  */
4831     void
4832 do_c_expr_indent()
4833 {
4834 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4835     if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4836 	fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4837     else
4838 # endif
4839 	fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4840 }
4841 
4842 /*
4843  * Functions for C-indenting.
4844  * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4845  */
4846 /*
4847  * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4848  */
4849 
4850 static char_u	*cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4851 static int	cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4852 static pos_T	*find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4853 static int	cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4854 static int	cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4855 static char_u	*after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4856 static int	get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4857 static int	skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4858 static int	cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4859 static int	cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4860 static int	cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4861 static int	cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4862 static int	cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4863 static int	cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4864 static int	cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4865 static int	cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4866 static int	cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4867 static int	cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4868 static int	cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4869 static int	cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4870 static int	cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4871 static int	cin_iswhileofdo_end __ARGS((int terminated, int	ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4872 static int	cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4873 static int	cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((colnr_T *col));
4874 static int	get_baseclass_amount __ARGS((int col, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment, int ind_cpp_baseclass));
4875 static int	cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4876 static int	cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4877 static pos_T	*find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4878 static pos_T	*find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4879 static int	corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4880 static int	find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4881 static int	find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4882 
4883 static int	ind_hash_comment = 0;   /* # starts a comment */
4884 
4885 /*
4886  * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4887  * Also skip over Perl/shell comments if desired.
4888  */
4889     static char_u *
4890 cin_skipcomment(s)
4891     char_u	*s;
4892 {
4893     while (*s)
4894     {
4895 	char_u *prev_s = s;
4896 
4897 	s = skipwhite(s);
4898 
4899 	/* Perl/shell # comment comment continues until eol.  Require a space
4900 	 * before # to avoid recognizing $#array. */
4901 	if (ind_hash_comment != 0 && s != prev_s && *s == '#')
4902 	{
4903 	    s += STRLEN(s);
4904 	    break;
4905 	}
4906 	if (*s != '/')
4907 	    break;
4908 	++s;
4909 	if (*s == '/')		/* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4910 	{
4911 	    s += STRLEN(s);
4912 	    break;
4913 	}
4914 	if (*s != '*')
4915 	    break;
4916 	for (++s; *s; ++s)	/* skip slash-star comment */
4917 	    if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4918 	    {
4919 		s += 2;
4920 		break;
4921 	    }
4922     }
4923     return s;
4924 }
4925 
4926 /*
4927  * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s.  White space and comments are
4928  * not considered code.
4929  */
4930     static int
4931 cin_nocode(s)
4932     char_u	*s;
4933 {
4934     return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4935 }
4936 
4937 /*
4938  * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4939  */
4940     static pos_T *
4941 find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4942 {
4943     static pos_T pos;
4944     char_u	 *line;
4945     char_u	 *p;
4946 
4947     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4948     while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4949     {
4950 	line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4951 	p = skipwhite(line);
4952 	if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4953 	{
4954 	    pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4955 	    return &pos;
4956 	}
4957 	if (*p != NUL)
4958 	    break;
4959     }
4960     return NULL;
4961 }
4962 
4963 /*
4964  * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4965  */
4966     static int
4967 cin_islabel_skip(s)
4968     char_u	**s;
4969 {
4970     if (!vim_isIDc(**s))	    /* need at least one ID character */
4971 	return FALSE;
4972 
4973     while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4974 	(*s)++;
4975 
4976     *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4977 
4978     /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4979     return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4980 }
4981 
4982 /*
4983  * Recognize a label: "label:".
4984  * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4985  */
4986     int
4987 cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)		/* XXX */
4988     int		ind_maxcomment;
4989 {
4990     char_u	*s;
4991 
4992     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4993 
4994     /*
4995      * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4996      * like a switch label.  Same for C++ scope declarations.
4997      */
4998     if (cin_isdefault(s))
4999 	return FALSE;
5000     if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
5001 	return FALSE;
5002 
5003     if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
5004     {
5005 	/*
5006 	 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
5007 	 * label.
5008 	 */
5009 	pos_T	cursor_save;
5010 	pos_T	*trypos;
5011 	char_u	*line;
5012 
5013 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5014 	while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
5015 	{
5016 	    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5017 
5018 	    /*
5019 	     * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
5020 	     */
5021 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5022 	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
5023 		curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5024 
5025 	    line = ml_get_curline();
5026 	    if (cin_ispreproc(line))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
5027 		continue;
5028 	    if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
5029 		continue;
5030 
5031 	    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5032 	    if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
5033 		    || cin_isscopedecl(line)
5034 		    || cin_iscase(line)
5035 		    || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
5036 		return TRUE;
5037 	    return FALSE;
5038 	}
5039 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5040 	return TRUE;		/* label at start of file??? */
5041     }
5042     return FALSE;
5043 }
5044 
5045 /*
5046  * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
5047  * Q&D-Implementation:
5048  * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
5049  */
5050     static int
5051 cin_isinit(void)
5052 {
5053     char_u	*s;
5054 
5055     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
5056 
5057     if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
5058 	s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
5059 
5060     if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
5061 	return TRUE;
5062 
5063     if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
5064 	return TRUE;
5065 
5066     return FALSE;
5067 }
5068 
5069 /*
5070  * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
5071  */
5072      int
5073 cin_iscase(s)
5074     char_u *s;
5075 {
5076     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5077     if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
5078     {
5079 	for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
5080 	{
5081 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5082 	    if (*s == ':')
5083 	    {
5084 		if (s[1] == ':')	/* skip over "::" for C++ */
5085 		    ++s;
5086 		else
5087 		    return TRUE;
5088 	    }
5089 	    if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
5090 		s += 2;			/* skip over '.' */
5091 	    else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
5092 		return FALSE;		/* stop at comment */
5093 	    else if (*s == '"')
5094 		return FALSE;		/* stop at string */
5095 	}
5096 	return FALSE;
5097     }
5098 
5099     if (cin_isdefault(s))
5100 	return TRUE;
5101     return FALSE;
5102 }
5103 
5104 /*
5105  * Recognize a "default" switch label.
5106  */
5107     static int
5108 cin_isdefault(s)
5109     char_u  *s;
5110 {
5111     return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
5112 	    && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
5113 	    && s[1] != ':');
5114 }
5115 
5116 /*
5117  * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
5118  */
5119     int
5120 cin_isscopedecl(s)
5121     char_u	*s;
5122 {
5123     int		i;
5124 
5125     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5126     if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
5127 	i = 6;
5128     else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
5129 	i = 9;
5130     else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
5131 	i = 7;
5132     else
5133 	return FALSE;
5134     return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
5135 }
5136 
5137 /*
5138  * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
5139  * Return NULL if not found.
5140  *	  case 234:    a = b;
5141  *		       ^
5142  */
5143     static char_u *
5144 after_label(l)
5145     char_u  *l;
5146 {
5147     for ( ; *l; ++l)
5148     {
5149 	if (*l == ':')
5150 	{
5151 	    if (l[1] == ':')	    /* skip over "::" for C++ */
5152 		++l;
5153 	    else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
5154 		break;
5155 	}
5156 	else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
5157 	    l += 2;		    /* skip over 'x' */
5158     }
5159     if (*l == NUL)
5160 	return NULL;
5161     l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
5162     if (*l == NUL)
5163 	return NULL;
5164     return l;
5165 }
5166 
5167 /*
5168  * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
5169  * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
5170  */
5171     static int
5172 get_indent_nolabel(lnum)		/* XXX */
5173     linenr_T	lnum;
5174 {
5175     char_u	*l;
5176     pos_T	fp;
5177     colnr_T	col;
5178     char_u	*p;
5179 
5180     l = ml_get(lnum);
5181     p = after_label(l);
5182     if (p == NULL)
5183 	return 0;
5184 
5185     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
5186     fp.lnum = lnum;
5187     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5188     return (int)col;
5189 }
5190 
5191 /*
5192  * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
5193  * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label) in "pp".
5194  *   label:	if (asdf && asdfasdf)
5195  *		^
5196  */
5197     static int
5198 skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
5199     linenr_T	lnum;
5200     char_u	**pp;
5201     int		ind_maxcomment;
5202 {
5203     char_u	*l;
5204     int		amount;
5205     pos_T	cursor_save;
5206 
5207     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5208     curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5209     l = ml_get_curline();
5210 				    /* XXX */
5211     if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
5212     {
5213 	amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
5214 	l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
5215 	if (l == NULL)		/* just in case */
5216 	    l = ml_get_curline();
5217     }
5218     else
5219     {
5220 	amount = get_indent();
5221 	l = ml_get_curline();
5222     }
5223     *pp = l;
5224 
5225     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5226     return amount;
5227 }
5228 
5229 /*
5230  * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
5231  *  int	    a,			indent of "a"
5232  *  static struct foo    b,	indent of "b"
5233  *  enum bla    c,		indent of "c"
5234  * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
5235  */
5236     static int
5237 cin_first_id_amount()
5238 {
5239     char_u	*line, *p, *s;
5240     int		len;
5241     pos_T	fp;
5242     colnr_T	col;
5243 
5244     line = ml_get_curline();
5245     p = skipwhite(line);
5246     len = (int)(skiptowhite(p) - p);
5247     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
5248     {
5249 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5250 	len = (int)(skiptowhite(p) - p);
5251     }
5252     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
5253 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5254     else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
5255 	p = skipwhite(p + 4);
5256     else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
5257 	    || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
5258     {
5259 	s = skipwhite(p + len);
5260 	if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
5261 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
5262 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
5263 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
5264 	    p = s;
5265     }
5266     for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5267 	;
5268     if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5269 	return 0;
5270 
5271     p = skipwhite(p + len);
5272     fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5273     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5274     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5275     return (int)col;
5276 }
5277 
5278 /*
5279  * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5280  *       char *foo = "here";
5281  * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5282  * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5283  *      foo = "asdf\
5284  *	       asdf\
5285  *	       here";
5286  */
5287     static int
5288 cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5289     linenr_T	lnum;
5290 {
5291     char_u	*line;
5292     char_u	*s;
5293     colnr_T	col;
5294     pos_T	fp;
5295 
5296     if (lnum > 1)
5297     {
5298 	line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5299 	if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5300 	    return -1;
5301     }
5302 
5303     line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5304     while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5305     {
5306 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5307 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5308 	else
5309 	    ++s;
5310     }
5311     if (*s != '=')
5312 	return 0;
5313 
5314     s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5315     if (cin_nocode(s))
5316 	return 0;
5317 
5318     if (*s == '"')	/* nice alignment for continued strings */
5319 	++s;
5320 
5321     fp.lnum = lnum;
5322     fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5323     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5324     return (int)col;
5325 }
5326 
5327 /*
5328  * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5329  */
5330     static int
5331 cin_ispreproc(s)
5332     char_u *s;
5333 {
5334     s = skipwhite(s);
5335     if (*s == '#')
5336 	return TRUE;
5337     return FALSE;
5338 }
5339 
5340 /*
5341  * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5342  * continuation line of a preprocessor statement.  Decrease "*lnump" to the
5343  * start and return the line in "*pp".
5344  */
5345     static int
5346 cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5347     char_u	**pp;
5348     linenr_T	*lnump;
5349 {
5350     char_u	*line = *pp;
5351     linenr_T	lnum = *lnump;
5352     int		retval = FALSE;
5353 
5354     for (;;)
5355     {
5356 	if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5357 	{
5358 	    retval = TRUE;
5359 	    *lnump = lnum;
5360 	    break;
5361 	}
5362 	if (lnum == 1)
5363 	    break;
5364 	line = ml_get(--lnum);
5365 	if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5366 	    break;
5367     }
5368 
5369     if (lnum != *lnump)
5370 	*pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5371     return retval;
5372 }
5373 
5374 /*
5375  * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5376  */
5377     static int
5378 cin_iscomment(p)
5379     char_u  *p;
5380 {
5381     return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5382 }
5383 
5384 /*
5385  * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5386  */
5387     static int
5388 cin_islinecomment(p)
5389     char_u *p;
5390 {
5391     return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5392 }
5393 
5394 /*
5395  * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5396  * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5397  * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5398  * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5399  */
5400     static int
5401 cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5402     char_u	*s;
5403     int		incl_open;	/* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5404     int		incl_comma;	/* recognize a trailing comma */
5405 {
5406     char_u found_start = 0;
5407 
5408     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5409 
5410     if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5411 	found_start = *s;
5412 
5413     while (*s)
5414     {
5415 	/* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5416 	s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5417 	if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5418 						 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5419 		&& cin_nocode(s + 1))
5420 	    return *s;
5421 
5422 	if (*s)
5423 	    s++;
5424     }
5425     return found_start;
5426 }
5427 
5428 /*
5429  * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5430  * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5431  * no semicolons anywhere.
5432  * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5433  * "sp" points to a string with the line.  When looking at other lines it must
5434  * be restored to the line.  When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5435  * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5436  */
5437     static int
5438 cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5439     char_u	**sp;
5440     linenr_T	first_lnum;
5441 {
5442     char_u	*s;
5443     linenr_T	lnum = first_lnum;
5444     int		retval = FALSE;
5445 
5446     if (sp == NULL)
5447 	s = ml_get(lnum);
5448     else
5449 	s = *sp;
5450 
5451     while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5452     {
5453 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5454 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5455 	else
5456 	    ++s;
5457     }
5458     if (*s != '(')
5459 	return FALSE;		/* ';', ' or "  before any () or no '(' */
5460 
5461     while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5462     {
5463 	if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5464 	{
5465 	    /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5466 	     * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5467 	     *       #if defined(x) && \
5468 	     *		 defined(y)
5469 	     */
5470 	    lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5471 	    s = ml_get(lnum);
5472 	    if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5473 		retval = TRUE;
5474 	    goto done;
5475 	}
5476 	if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5477 	{
5478 	    /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5479 	    if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5480 		break;
5481 
5482 	    s = ml_get(++lnum);
5483 	}
5484 	else if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5485 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5486 	else
5487 	    ++s;
5488     }
5489 
5490 done:
5491     if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5492 	*sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5493 
5494     return retval;
5495 }
5496 
5497     static int
5498 cin_isif(p)
5499     char_u  *p;
5500 {
5501     return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5502 }
5503 
5504     static int
5505 cin_iselse(p)
5506     char_u  *p;
5507 {
5508     if (*p == '}')	    /* accept "} else" */
5509 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5510     return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5511 }
5512 
5513     static int
5514 cin_isdo(p)
5515     char_u  *p;
5516 {
5517     return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5518 }
5519 
5520 /*
5521  * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5522  * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5523  * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5524  */
5525     static int
5526 cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen)	    /* XXX */
5527     char_u	*p;
5528     linenr_T	lnum;
5529     int		ind_maxparen;
5530 {
5531     pos_T	cursor_save;
5532     pos_T	*trypos;
5533     int		retval = FALSE;
5534 
5535     p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5536     if (*p == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
5537 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5538     if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5539     {
5540 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5541 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5542 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5543 	p = ml_get_curline();
5544 	while (*p && *p != 'w')	/* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5545 	{
5546 	    ++p;
5547 	    ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5548 	}
5549 	if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5550 		&& *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5551 	    retval = TRUE;
5552 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5553     }
5554     return retval;
5555 }
5556 
5557 /*
5558  * Return TRUE if we are at the end of a do-while.
5559  *    do
5560  *       nothing;
5561  *    while (foo
5562  *	       && bar);  <-- here
5563  * Adjust the cursor to the line with "while".
5564  */
5565     static int
5566 cin_iswhileofdo_end(terminated, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
5567     int	    terminated;
5568     int	    ind_maxparen;
5569     int	    ind_maxcomment;
5570 {
5571     char_u	*line;
5572     char_u	*p;
5573     char_u	*s;
5574     pos_T	*trypos;
5575     int		i;
5576 
5577     if (terminated != ';')	/* there must be a ';' at the end */
5578 	return FALSE;
5579 
5580     p = line = ml_get_curline();
5581     while (*p != NUL)
5582     {
5583 	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5584 	if (*p == ')')
5585 	{
5586 	    s = skipwhite(p + 1);
5587 	    if (*s == ';' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5588 	    {
5589 		/* Found ");" at end of the line, now check there is "while"
5590 		 * before the matching '('.  XXX */
5591 		i = (int)(p - line);
5592 		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5593 		trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment);
5594 		if (trypos != NULL)
5595 		{
5596 		    s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get(trypos->lnum));
5597 		    if (*s == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
5598 			s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5599 		    if (STRNCMP(s, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5600 		    {
5601 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
5602 			return TRUE;
5603 		    }
5604 		}
5605 
5606 		/* Searching may have made "line" invalid, get it again. */
5607 		line = ml_get_curline();
5608 		p = line + i;
5609 	    }
5610 	}
5611 	if (*p != NUL)
5612 	    ++p;
5613     }
5614     return FALSE;
5615 }
5616 
5617     static int
5618 cin_isbreak(p)
5619     char_u  *p;
5620 {
5621     return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5622 }
5623 
5624 /*
5625  * Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5626  * constructor-initialization. eg:
5627  *
5628  * class MyClass :
5629  *	baseClass		<-- here
5630  * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5631  *	anotherBaseClass	<-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5632  * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5633  *	baseClass(...)		<-- here (constructor-initialization)
5634  *
5635  * This is a lot of guessing.  Watch out for "cond ? func() : foo".
5636  */
5637     static int
5638 cin_is_cpp_baseclass(col)
5639     colnr_T	*col;	    /* return: column to align with */
5640 {
5641     char_u	*s;
5642     int		class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5643     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5644     char_u	*line = ml_get_curline();
5645 
5646     *col = 0;
5647 
5648     s = skipwhite(line);
5649     if (*s == '#')		/* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5650 	return FALSE;
5651     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5652     if (*s == NUL)
5653 	return FALSE;
5654 
5655     cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5656 
5657     /* Search for a line starting with '#', empty, ending in ';' or containing
5658      * '{' or '}' and start below it.  This handles the following situations:
5659      *	a = cond ?
5660      *	      func() :
5661      *		   asdf;
5662      *	func::foo()
5663      *	      : something
5664      *	{}
5665      *	Foo::Foo (int one, int two)
5666      *		: something(4),
5667      *		somethingelse(3)
5668      *	{}
5669      */
5670     while (lnum > 1)
5671     {
5672 	line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5673 	s = skipwhite(line);
5674 	if (*s == '#' || *s == NUL)
5675 	    break;
5676 	while (*s != NUL)
5677 	{
5678 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5679 	    if (*s == '{' || *s == '}'
5680 		    || (*s == ';' && cin_nocode(s + 1)))
5681 		break;
5682 	    if (*s != NUL)
5683 		++s;
5684 	}
5685 	if (*s != NUL)
5686 	    break;
5687 	--lnum;
5688     }
5689 
5690     line = ml_get(lnum);
5691     s = cin_skipcomment(line);
5692     for (;;)
5693     {
5694 	if (*s == NUL)
5695 	{
5696 	    if (lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
5697 		break;
5698 	    /* Continue in the cursor line. */
5699 	    line = ml_get(++lnum);
5700 	    s = cin_skipcomment(line);
5701 	    if (*s == NUL)
5702 		continue;
5703 	}
5704 
5705 	if (s[0] == ':')
5706 	{
5707 	    if (s[1] == ':')
5708 	    {
5709 		/* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5710 		 * initialization any more */
5711 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5712 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5713 	    }
5714 	    else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5715 	    {
5716 		/* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5717 		 * cpp-base-class-declaration or constructor-initialization */
5718 		cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5719 		lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5720 		*col = 0;
5721 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5722 	    }
5723 	    else
5724 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5725 	}
5726 	else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5727 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5728 	{
5729 	    class_or_struct = TRUE;
5730 	    lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5731 
5732 	    if (*s == 'c')
5733 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5734 	    else
5735 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5736 	}
5737 	else
5738 	{
5739 	    if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5740 	    {
5741 		cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5742 	    }
5743 	    else if (s[0] == ')')
5744 	    {
5745 		/* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5746 		 * something like "):" */
5747 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5748 		lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5749 	    }
5750 	    else if (s[0] == '?')
5751 	    {
5752 		/* Avoid seeing '() :' after '?' as constructor init. */
5753 		return FALSE;
5754 	    }
5755 	    else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5756 	    {
5757 		/* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5758 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5759 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5760 	    }
5761 	    else if (*col == 0)
5762 	    {
5763 		/* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5764 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5765 
5766 		/* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5767 		if (cpp_base_class)
5768 		    *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5769 	    }
5770 
5771 	    /* When the line ends in a comma don't align with it. */
5772 	    if (lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum && *s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5773 		*col = 0;
5774 
5775 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5776 	}
5777     }
5778 
5779     return cpp_base_class;
5780 }
5781 
5782     static int
5783 get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass)
5784     int		col;
5785     int		ind_maxparen;
5786     int		ind_maxcomment;
5787     int		ind_cpp_baseclass;
5788 {
5789     int		amount;
5790     colnr_T	vcol;
5791     pos_T	*trypos;
5792 
5793     if (col == 0)
5794     {
5795 	amount = get_indent();
5796 	if (find_last_paren(ml_get_curline(), '(', ')')
5797 		&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
5798 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
5799 	    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
5800 	if (!cin_ends_in(ml_get_curline(), (char_u *)",", NULL))
5801 	    amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
5802     }
5803     else
5804     {
5805 	curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
5806 	getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &vcol, NULL, NULL);
5807 	amount = (int)vcol;
5808     }
5809     if (amount < ind_cpp_baseclass)
5810 	amount = ind_cpp_baseclass;
5811     return amount;
5812 }
5813 
5814 /*
5815  * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5816  * white space and comments.  Skip strings and comments.
5817  * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5818  */
5819     static int
5820 cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5821     char_u	*s;
5822     char_u	*find;
5823     char_u	*ignore;
5824 {
5825     char_u	*p = s;
5826     char_u	*r;
5827     int		len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5828 
5829     while (*p != NUL)
5830     {
5831 	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5832 	if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5833 	{
5834 	    r = skipwhite(p + len);
5835 	    if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5836 		r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5837 	    if (cin_nocode(r))
5838 		return TRUE;
5839 	}
5840 	if (*p != NUL)
5841 	    ++p;
5842     }
5843     return FALSE;
5844 }
5845 
5846 /*
5847  * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5848  * Return the column found.
5849  */
5850     static int
5851 cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5852     pos_T	*trypos;
5853 {
5854     char_u	*line;
5855     char_u	*p;
5856 
5857     p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5858     while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5859     {
5860 	if (cin_iscomment(p))
5861 	    p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5862 	else
5863 	{
5864 	    p = skip_string(p);
5865 	    ++p;
5866 	}
5867     }
5868     return (int)(p - line);
5869 }
5870 
5871 /*
5872  * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5873  * Return NULL if no match found.
5874  * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5875  * work. */
5876 /* foo()    */
5877 /* {	    */
5878 /* }	    */
5879 
5880     static pos_T *
5881 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5882     int		ind_maxcomment;
5883 {
5884     pos_T	cursor_save;
5885     pos_T	*trypos;
5886     pos_T	*pos;
5887     static pos_T	pos_copy;
5888 
5889     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5890     while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5891     {
5892 	pos_copy = *trypos;	/* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5893 	trypos = &pos_copy;
5894 	curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5895 	pos = NULL;
5896 	/* ignore the { if it's in a // or / *  * / comment */
5897 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5898 		&& (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5899 	    break;
5900 	if (pos != NULL)
5901 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5902     }
5903     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5904     return trypos;
5905 }
5906 
5907 /*
5908  * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5909  * Return NULL of no match found.
5910  */
5911     static pos_T *
5912 find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5913     int		ind_maxparen;
5914     int		ind_maxcomment;
5915 {
5916     pos_T	cursor_save;
5917     pos_T	*trypos;
5918     static pos_T pos_copy;
5919 
5920     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5921     if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5922     {
5923 	/* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5924 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5925 	    trypos = NULL;
5926 	else
5927 	{
5928 	    pos_copy = *trypos;	    /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5929 	    trypos = &pos_copy;
5930 	    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5931 	    if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5932 		trypos = NULL;
5933 	}
5934     }
5935     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5936     return trypos;
5937 }
5938 
5939 /*
5940  * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5941  * cursor position and "startpos".  This makes sure that searching for a
5942  * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5943  * looking a few lines further.
5944  */
5945     static int
5946 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5947     int		ind_maxparen;
5948     pos_T	*startpos;
5949 {
5950     long	n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5951 
5952     if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5953 	return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5954     return ind_maxparen;
5955 }
5956 
5957 /*
5958  * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5959  * line "l".
5960  */
5961     static int
5962 find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5963     char_u	*l;
5964     int		start, end;
5965 {
5966     int		i;
5967     int		retval = FALSE;
5968     int		open_count = 0;
5969 
5970     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;		    /* default is start of line */
5971 
5972     for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5973     {
5974 	i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5975 	i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l);    /* ignore parens in quotes */
5976 	if (l[i] == start)
5977 	    ++open_count;
5978 	else if (l[i] == end)
5979 	{
5980 	    if (open_count > 0)
5981 		--open_count;
5982 	    else
5983 	    {
5984 		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5985 		retval = TRUE;
5986 	    }
5987 	}
5988     }
5989     return retval;
5990 }
5991 
5992     int
5993 get_c_indent()
5994 {
5995     /*
5996      * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5997      * block should be
5998      */
5999     int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6000 
6001     /*
6002      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
6003      * line is imagined to be.
6004      */
6005     int ind_open_imag = 0;
6006 
6007     /*
6008      * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
6009      * an opening brace.
6010      */
6011     int ind_no_brace = 0;
6012 
6013     /*
6014      * column where the first { of a function should be located }
6015      */
6016     int ind_first_open = 0;
6017 
6018     /*
6019      * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
6020      * located
6021      */
6022     int ind_open_extra = 0;
6023 
6024     /*
6025      * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
6026      * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
6027      * brace should be located
6028      */
6029     int ind_close_extra = 0;
6030 
6031     /*
6032      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
6033      * column is imagined to be
6034      */
6035     int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
6036 
6037     /*
6038      * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
6039      */
6040     int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6041 
6042     /*
6043      * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
6044      */
6045     int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6046 
6047     /*
6048      * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
6049      */
6050     int ind_case_break = 0;
6051 
6052     /*
6053      * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
6054      * should be located
6055      */
6056     int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6057 
6058     /*
6059      * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
6060      */
6061     int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6062 
6063     /*
6064      * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
6065      */
6066     int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6067 
6068     /*
6069      * amount a function type spec should be indented
6070      */
6071     int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6072 
6073     /*
6074      * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
6075      * should be indented
6076      */
6077     int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6078 
6079     /*
6080      * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
6081      * should be located
6082      */
6083     int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6084 
6085     /*
6086      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
6087      */
6088     int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
6089 
6090     /*
6091      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
6092      * itself is also unclosed
6093      */
6094     int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
6095 
6096     /*
6097      * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
6098      * unclosed parentheses.
6099      */
6100     int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
6101 
6102     /*
6103      * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
6104      * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
6105      * context (for very long lines).
6106      */
6107     int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
6108 
6109     /*
6110      * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
6111      * an unclosed parentheses.
6112      */
6113     int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
6114 
6115     /*
6116      * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
6117      * opening parentheses.
6118      */
6119     int ind_matching_paren = 0;
6120 
6121     /*
6122      * indent a closing parentheses under the previous line.
6123      */
6124     int ind_paren_prev = 0;
6125 
6126     /*
6127      * Extra indent for comments.
6128      */
6129     int ind_comment = 0;
6130 
6131     /*
6132      * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
6133      */
6134     int ind_in_comment = 3;
6135 
6136     /*
6137      * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
6138      * after the comment opener.
6139      */
6140     int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
6141 
6142     /*
6143      * max lines to search for an open paren
6144      */
6145     int ind_maxparen = 20;
6146 
6147     /*
6148      * max lines to search for an open comment
6149      */
6150     int ind_maxcomment = 70;
6151 
6152     /*
6153      * handle braces for java code
6154      */
6155     int	ind_java = 0;
6156 
6157     /*
6158      * handle blocked cases correctly
6159      */
6160     int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
6161 
6162     pos_T	cur_curpos;
6163     int		amount;
6164     int		scope_amount;
6165     int		cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6166     colnr_T	col;
6167     char_u	*theline;
6168     char_u	*linecopy;
6169     pos_T	*trypos;
6170     pos_T	*tryposBrace = NULL;
6171     pos_T	our_paren_pos;
6172     char_u	*start;
6173     int		start_brace;
6174 #define BRACE_IN_COL0		1	    /* '{' is in column 0 */
6175 #define BRACE_AT_START		2	    /* '{' is at start of line */
6176 #define BRACE_AT_END		3	    /* '{' is at end of line */
6177     linenr_T	ourscope;
6178     char_u	*l;
6179     char_u	*look;
6180     char_u	terminated;
6181     int		lookfor;
6182 #define LOOKFOR_INITIAL		0
6183 #define LOOKFOR_IF		1
6184 #define LOOKFOR_DO		2
6185 #define LOOKFOR_CASE		3
6186 #define LOOKFOR_ANY		4
6187 #define LOOKFOR_TERM		5
6188 #define LOOKFOR_UNTERM		6
6189 #define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL	7
6190 #define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK		8
6191 #define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS	9
6192 #define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT	10
6193 
6194     int		whilelevel;
6195     linenr_T	lnum;
6196     char_u	*options;
6197     int		fraction = 0;	    /* init for GCC */
6198     int		divider;
6199     int		n;
6200     int		iscase;
6201     int		lookfor_break;
6202     int		cont_amount = 0;    /* amount for continuation line */
6203 
6204     for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
6205     {
6206 	l = options++;
6207 	if (*options == '-')
6208 	    ++options;
6209 	n = getdigits(&options);
6210 	divider = 0;
6211 	if (*options == '.')	    /* ".5s" means a fraction */
6212 	{
6213 	    fraction = atol((char *)++options);
6214 	    while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
6215 	    {
6216 		++options;
6217 		if (divider)
6218 		    divider *= 10;
6219 		else
6220 		    divider = 10;
6221 	    }
6222 	}
6223 	if (*options == 's')	    /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
6224 	{
6225 	    if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
6226 		n = curbuf->b_p_sw;	/* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
6227 	    else
6228 	    {
6229 		n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
6230 		if (divider)
6231 		    n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
6232 	    }
6233 	    ++options;
6234 	}
6235 	if (l[1] == '-')
6236 	    n = -n;
6237 	/* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
6238 	 * doc/indent.txt, and add explanation for it! */
6239 	switch (*l)
6240 	{
6241 	    case '>': ind_level = n; break;
6242 	    case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
6243 	    case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
6244 	    case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
6245 	    case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
6246 	    case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
6247 	    case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
6248 	    case ':': ind_case = n; break;
6249 	    case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
6250 	    case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
6251 	    case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
6252 	    case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
6253 	    case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
6254 	    case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
6255 	    case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
6256 	    case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
6257 	    case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
6258 	    case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
6259 	    case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
6260 	    case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
6261 	    case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
6262 	    case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
6263 	    case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
6264 	    case 'M': ind_paren_prev = n; break;
6265 	    case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
6266 	    case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
6267 	    case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
6268 	    case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
6269 	    case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
6270 	    case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
6271 	    case '#': ind_hash_comment = n; break;
6272 	}
6273 	if (*options == ',')
6274 	    ++options;
6275     }
6276 
6277     /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
6278     cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
6279 
6280     /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
6281      * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
6282      * ml_get is valid! */
6283     linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
6284     if (linecopy == NULL)
6285 	return 0;
6286 
6287     /*
6288      * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
6289      * cursor position.  We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
6290      * inserting new stuff.
6291      * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
6292      * check for that.
6293      */
6294     if ((State & INSERT)
6295 	    && curwin->w_cursor.col < (colnr_T)STRLEN(linecopy)
6296 	    && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
6297 	linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
6298 
6299     theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
6300 
6301     /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
6302 
6303     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6304 
6305     /*
6306      * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
6307      */
6308     if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
6309     {
6310 	amount = 0;
6311     }
6312 
6313     /*
6314      * Is it a non-case label?	Then that goes at the left margin too.
6315      */
6316     else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))	    /* XXX */
6317     {
6318 	amount = 0;
6319     }
6320 
6321     /*
6322      * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
6323      * previous line, lineup with that one.
6324      */
6325     else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
6326 	    && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
6327     {
6328 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
6329 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6330 	amount = col;
6331     }
6332 
6333     /*
6334      * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
6335      * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
6336      */
6337     else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
6338 	    && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
6339     {
6340 	int	lead_start_len = 2;
6341 	int	lead_middle_len = 1;
6342 	char_u	lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* start-comment string */
6343 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* middle-comment string */
6344 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];		/* end-comment string */
6345 	char_u	*p;
6346 	int	start_align = 0;
6347 	int	start_off = 0;
6348 	int	done = FALSE;
6349 
6350 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
6351 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6352 	amount = col;
6353 
6354 	p = curbuf->b_p_com;
6355 	while (*p != NUL)
6356 	{
6357 	    int	align = 0;
6358 	    int	off = 0;
6359 	    int what = 0;
6360 
6361 	    while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
6362 	    {
6363 		if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
6364 		    what = *p++;
6365 		else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
6366 		    align = *p++;
6367 		else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
6368 		    off = getdigits(&p);
6369 		else
6370 		    ++p;
6371 	    }
6372 
6373 	    if (*p == ':')
6374 		++p;
6375 	    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
6376 	    if (what == COM_START)
6377 	    {
6378 		STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
6379 		lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
6380 		start_off = off;
6381 		start_align = align;
6382 	    }
6383 	    else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
6384 	    {
6385 		STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
6386 		lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
6387 	    }
6388 	    else if (what == COM_END)
6389 	    {
6390 		/* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
6391 		 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
6392 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
6393 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
6394 		{
6395 		    done = TRUE;
6396 		    if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6397 		    {
6398 			/* If the start comment string matches in the previous
6399 			 * line, use the indent of that line plus offset.  If
6400 			 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
6401 			 * line, use the indent of that line.  XXX */
6402 			look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
6403 			if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
6404 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6405 			else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
6406 							lead_middle_len) == 0)
6407 			{
6408 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6409 			    break;
6410 			}
6411 			/* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
6412 			 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
6413 			else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
6414 					     lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
6415 			    continue;
6416 		    }
6417 		    if (start_off != 0)
6418 			amount += start_off;
6419 		    else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
6420 			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6421 						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
6422 		    break;
6423 		}
6424 
6425 		/* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6426 		 * with the middle comment */
6427 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6428 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6429 		{
6430 		    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6431 								     /* XXX */
6432 		    if (off != 0)
6433 			amount += off;
6434 		    else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
6435 			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6436 						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
6437 		    done = TRUE;
6438 		    break;
6439 		}
6440 	    }
6441 	}
6442 
6443 	/* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6444 	 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6445 	 * with the first character of the comment text.
6446 	 */
6447 	if (done)
6448 	    ;
6449 	else if (theline[0] == '*')
6450 	    amount += 1;
6451 	else
6452 	{
6453 	    /*
6454 	     * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6455 	     * the indent of the previous non-empty line.  If 'cino' has "CO"
6456 	     * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6457 	     * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6458 	     * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6459 	     */
6460 	    amount = -1;
6461 	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6462 	    {
6463 		if (linewhite(lnum))		    /* skip blank lines */
6464 		    continue;
6465 		amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	    /* XXX */
6466 		break;
6467 	    }
6468 	    if (amount == -1)			    /* use the comment opener */
6469 	    {
6470 		if (!ind_in_comment2)
6471 		{
6472 		    start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6473 		    look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6474 		    if (*look != NUL)		    /* if something after it */
6475 			trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6476 		}
6477 		getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6478 		amount = col;
6479 		if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6480 		    amount += ind_in_comment;
6481 	    }
6482 	}
6483     }
6484 
6485     /*
6486      * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6487      */						    /* XXX */
6488     else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6489 		&& ind_java == 0)
6490 	    || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6491 	    || trypos != NULL)
6492     {
6493       if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6494       {
6495 	  /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found.  Use the one which is
6496 	   * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6497 	  if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6498 		  ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6499 		  : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6500 	      trypos = NULL;
6501 	  else
6502 	      tryposBrace = NULL;
6503       }
6504 
6505       if (trypos != NULL)
6506       {
6507 	/*
6508 	 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6509 	 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6510 	 */
6511 	if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_paren_prev)
6512 	{
6513 	    /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6514 	    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);  /* XXX */
6515 	}
6516 	else
6517 	{
6518 	    amount = -1;
6519 	    our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6520 	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6521 	    {
6522 		l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6523 		if (cin_nocode(l))		/* skip comment lines */
6524 		    continue;
6525 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum))
6526 		    continue;			/* ignore #define, #if, etc. */
6527 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6528 
6529 		/* Skip a comment. XXX */
6530 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6531 		{
6532 		    lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6533 		    continue;
6534 		}
6535 
6536 		/* XXX */
6537 		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6538 				corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6539 						      ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6540 			&& trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6541 			&& trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6542 		{
6543 			amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	/* XXX */
6544 
6545 			if (theline[0] == ')')
6546 			{
6547 			    if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum
6548 						       && cur_amount > amount)
6549 				cur_amount = amount;
6550 			    amount = -1;
6551 			}
6552 		    break;
6553 		}
6554 	    }
6555 	}
6556 
6557 	/*
6558 	 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6559 	 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6560 	 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6561 	 */
6562 	if (amount == -1)
6563 	{
6564 	    int	    ignore_paren_col = 0;
6565 
6566 	    amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6567 	    look = skipwhite(look);
6568 	    if (*look == '(')
6569 	    {
6570 		linenr_T    save_lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6571 		char_u	    *line;
6572 		int	    look_col;
6573 
6574 		/* Ignore a '(' in front of the line that has a match before
6575 		 * our matching '('. */
6576 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6577 		line = ml_get_curline();
6578 		look_col = (int)(look - line);
6579 		curwin->w_cursor.col = look_col + 1;
6580 		if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, ')', 0, ind_maxparen))
6581 								      != NULL
6582 			  && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6583 			  && trypos->col < our_paren_pos.col)
6584 		    ignore_paren_col = trypos->col + 1;
6585 
6586 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = save_lnum;
6587 		look = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum) + look_col;
6588 	    }
6589 	    if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6590 		    || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *look == '('
6591 						    && ignore_paren_col == 0))
6592 	    {
6593 		/*
6594 		 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6595 		 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6596 		 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6597 		 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6598 		 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6599 		 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6600 		 * lines).
6601 		 */
6602 		if (theline[0] != ')')
6603 		{
6604 		    cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6605 		    l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6606 		    if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6607 				       && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6608 		    {
6609 			/* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6610 			 * for each additional level */
6611 			n = 1;
6612 			for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6613 			{
6614 			    switch (l[col])
6615 			    {
6616 				case '(':
6617 				case '{': ++n;
6618 					  break;
6619 
6620 				case ')':
6621 				case '}': if (n > 1)
6622 					      --n;
6623 					  break;
6624 			    }
6625 			}
6626 
6627 			our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6628 			amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6629 		    }
6630 		    else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6631 			our_paren_pos.col++;
6632 		    else
6633 		    {
6634 			col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6635 			while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6636 			    col++;
6637 			if (l[col] != NUL)	/* In case of trailing space */
6638 			    our_paren_pos.col = col;
6639 			else
6640 			    our_paren_pos.col++;
6641 		    }
6642 		}
6643 
6644 		/*
6645 		 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6646 		 * if we did the above "if".
6647 		 */
6648 		if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6649 		{
6650 		    getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6651 		    if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6652 			cur_amount = col;
6653 		}
6654 	    }
6655 
6656 	    if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6657 	    {
6658 		/* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6659 	    }
6660 	    else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6661 				    && *look == '(' && ignore_paren_col == 0))
6662 	    {
6663 		if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6664 		    amount = cur_amount;
6665 	    }
6666 	    else
6667 	    {
6668 		/* Add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one, but
6669 		 * ignore (void) before the line (ignore_paren_col). */
6670 		col = our_paren_pos.col;
6671 		while ((int)our_paren_pos.col > ignore_paren_col)
6672 		{
6673 		    --our_paren_pos.col;
6674 		    switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6675 		    {
6676 			case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6677 				  col = our_paren_pos.col;
6678 				  break;
6679 			case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6680 				  col = MAXCOL;
6681 				  break;
6682 		    }
6683 		}
6684 
6685 		/* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6686 		 * braces */
6687 		if (col == MAXCOL)
6688 		    amount += ind_unclosed;
6689 		else
6690 		{
6691 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6692 		    curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6693 		    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6694 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6695 			amount += ind_unclosed2;
6696 		    else
6697 			amount += ind_unclosed;
6698 		}
6699 		/*
6700 		 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6701 		 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6702 		 * lines:
6703 		 *  func_long_name(		    if (x
6704 		 *	arg				    && yy
6705 		 *	)	  ^ not here	       )    ^ not here
6706 		 */
6707 		if (cur_amount < amount)
6708 		    amount = cur_amount;
6709 	    }
6710 	}
6711 
6712 	/* add extra indent for a comment */
6713 	if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6714 	    amount += ind_comment;
6715       }
6716 
6717       /*
6718        * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6719        */
6720       else
6721       {
6722 	trypos = tryposBrace;
6723 
6724 	ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6725 	start = ml_get(ourscope);
6726 
6727 	/*
6728 	 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6729 	 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6730 	 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6731 	 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6732 	 */
6733 	look = skipwhite(start);
6734 	if (*look == '{')
6735 	{
6736 	    getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6737 	    amount = col;
6738 	    if (*start == '{')
6739 		start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6740 	    else
6741 		start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6742 	}
6743 	else
6744 	{
6745 	    /*
6746 	     * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6747 	     * line.  if so, find the start of the line.
6748 	     */
6749 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6750 
6751 	    /*
6752 	     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6753 	     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6754 	     */
6755 	    lnum = ourscope;
6756 	    if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6757 		    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6758 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6759 		lnum = trypos->lnum;
6760 
6761 	    /*
6762 	     * It could have been something like
6763 	     *	   case 1: if (asdf &&
6764 	     *			ldfd) {
6765 	     *		    }
6766 	     */
6767 	    if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6768 		amount = get_indent();
6769 	    else
6770 		amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6771 
6772 	    start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6773 	}
6774 
6775 	/*
6776 	 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6777 	 * we want to be.  otherwise, add the amount of room
6778 	 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6779 	 */
6780 	if (theline[0] == '}')
6781 	{
6782 	    /*
6783 	     * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6784 	     * other than the open brace.  indulge them, if so.
6785 	     */
6786 	    amount += ind_close_extra;
6787 	}
6788 	else
6789 	{
6790 	    /*
6791 	     * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6792 	     * to match it with.
6793 	     * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6794 	     * to match it with.
6795 	     */
6796 	    lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6797 	    if (cin_iselse(theline))
6798 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6799 	    else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6800 								    /* XXX */
6801 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6802 	    if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6803 	    {
6804 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6805 		if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6806 							ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6807 		{
6808 		    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6809 		    goto theend;
6810 		}
6811 	    }
6812 
6813 	    /*
6814 	     * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6815 	     * failed to find a matching "if").
6816 	     * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6817 	     * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6818 	     */
6819 
6820 	    /*
6821 	     * if the '{' is  _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6822 	     * location of a left-margin brace.  Otherwise, correct the
6823 	     * location for ind_open_extra.
6824 	     */
6825 
6826 	    if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0)	    /* '{' is in column 0 */
6827 	    {
6828 		amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6829 	    }
6830 	    else
6831 	    {
6832 		if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END)    /* '{' is at end of line */
6833 		    amount += ind_open_imag;
6834 		else
6835 		{
6836 		    /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6837 		    amount -= ind_open_extra;
6838 		    if (amount < 0)
6839 			amount = 0;
6840 		}
6841 	    }
6842 
6843 	    lookfor_break = FALSE;
6844 
6845 	    if (cin_iscase(theline))	/* it's a switch() label */
6846 	    {
6847 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE;	/* find a previous switch() label */
6848 		amount += ind_case;
6849 	    }
6850 	    else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline))	/* private:, ... */
6851 	    {
6852 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL;	/* class decl is this block */
6853 		amount += ind_scopedecl;
6854 	    }
6855 	    else
6856 	    {
6857 		if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline))	/* break; ... */
6858 		    lookfor_break = TRUE;
6859 
6860 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6861 		amount += ind_level;	/* ind_level from start of block */
6862 	    }
6863 	    scope_amount = amount;
6864 	    whilelevel = 0;
6865 
6866 	    /*
6867 	     * Search backwards.  If we find something we recognize, line up
6868 	     * with that.
6869 	     *
6870 	     * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6871 	     * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6872 	     * that opens the block.
6873 	     */
6874 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6875 	    for (;;)
6876 	    {
6877 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6878 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6879 
6880 		/*
6881 		 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6882 		 * up with it.
6883 		 */
6884 		if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6885 		{
6886 		    /* we reached end of scope:
6887 		     * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6888 		     * go further back:
6889 		     * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6890 		     * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6891 		     * declaration:
6892 		     * int x,
6893 		     *     here; <-- add ind_continuation
6894 		     */
6895 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6896 		    {
6897 			if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6898 				|| curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6899 						    < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6900 			{
6901 			    /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6902 			     * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6903 			     * initialization) */
6904 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6905 				amount = cont_amount;
6906 			    else
6907 				amount += ind_continuation;
6908 			    break;
6909 			}
6910 
6911 			l = ml_get_curline();
6912 
6913 			/*
6914 			 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6915 			 * comment.
6916 			 */
6917 			trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6918 			if (trypos != NULL)
6919 			{
6920 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6921 			    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6922 			    continue;
6923 			}
6924 
6925 			/*
6926 			 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6927 			 */
6928 			if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6929 			    continue;
6930 
6931 			if (cin_nocode(l))
6932 			    continue;
6933 
6934 			terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6935 
6936 			/*
6937 			 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6938 			 * function declaration, we are done
6939 			 * (it's a variable declaration).
6940 			 */
6941 			if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6942 				|| !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6943 			{
6944 			    /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6945 			     * it is a continued variable initialization.
6946 			     * don't add extra indent.
6947 			     * TODO: does not work, if  a function
6948 			     * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6949 			     * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6950 			     */
6951 			    if (terminated == ',')
6952 				break;
6953 
6954 			    /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6955 			     * we are done.
6956 			     */
6957 			    if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6958 				break;
6959 
6960 			    /* nothing useful found */
6961 			    if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6962 				continue;
6963 			}
6964 
6965 			if (terminated != ';')
6966 			{
6967 			    /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6968 			     * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6969 			     * will take us back to the start of the line.
6970 			     */					/* XXX */
6971 			    trypos = NULL;
6972 			    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6973 				trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6974 					ind_maxcomment);
6975 
6976 			    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6977 				trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6978 
6979 			    if (trypos != NULL)
6980 			    {
6981 				curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6982 				curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6983 				continue;
6984 			    }
6985 			}
6986 
6987 			/* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6988 			 * like in
6989 			 * int a,
6990 			 *    b;
6991 			 */
6992 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6993 			    amount = cont_amount;
6994 			else
6995 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6996 		    }
6997 		    else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6998 		    {
6999 			if (cont_amount > 0)
7000 			    amount = cont_amount;
7001 			else
7002 			    amount += ind_continuation;
7003 		    }
7004 		    else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
7005 					  && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
7006 		    {
7007 			amount = scope_amount;
7008 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7009 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7010 		    }
7011 		    break;
7012 		}
7013 
7014 		/*
7015 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7016 		 */					    /* XXX */
7017 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7018 		{
7019 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7020 		    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7021 		    continue;
7022 		}
7023 
7024 		l = ml_get_curline();
7025 
7026 		/*
7027 		 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
7028 		 * If this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
7029 		 */
7030 		iscase = cin_iscase(l);
7031 		if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7032 		{
7033 		    /* we are only looking for cpp base class
7034 		     * declaration/initialization any longer */
7035 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
7036 			break;
7037 
7038 		    /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
7039 		     * labels. */
7040 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
7041 			continue;
7042 
7043 		    /*
7044 		     *	case xx:
7045 		     *	    c = 99 +	    <- this indent plus continuation
7046 		     *->	   here;
7047 		     */
7048 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7049 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7050 		    {
7051 			if (cont_amount > 0)
7052 			    amount = cont_amount;
7053 			else
7054 			    amount += ind_continuation;
7055 			break;
7056 		    }
7057 
7058 		    /*
7059 		     *	case xx:	<- line up with this case
7060 		     *	    x = 333;
7061 		     *	case yy:
7062 		     */
7063 		    if (       (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
7064 			    || (iscase && lookfor_break)
7065 			    || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
7066 		    {
7067 			/*
7068 			 * Check that this case label is not for another
7069 			 * switch()
7070 			 */				    /* XXX */
7071 			if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
7072 					     NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
7073 			{
7074 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
7075 			    break;
7076 			}
7077 			continue;
7078 		    }
7079 
7080 		    n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum);  /* XXX */
7081 
7082 		    /*
7083 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
7084 		     *		      y = y + 1;
7085 		     * ->	  s = 99;
7086 		     *
7087 		     *	 case xx:
7088 		     *	     if (cond)		<- line up with this line
7089 		     *		 y = y + 1;
7090 		     * ->    s = 99;
7091 		     */
7092 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7093 		    {
7094 			if (n)
7095 			    amount = n;
7096 
7097 			if (!lookfor_break)
7098 			    break;
7099 		    }
7100 
7101 		    /*
7102 		     *	 case xx: x = x + 1;	    <- line up with this x
7103 		     * ->	  y = y + 1;
7104 		     *
7105 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
7106 		     * ->	       y = y + 1;
7107 		     */
7108 		    if (n)
7109 		    {
7110 			amount = n;
7111 			l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
7112 			if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
7113 			{
7114 			    if (theline[0] == '{')
7115 				amount += ind_open_extra;
7116 			    else
7117 				amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
7118 			}
7119 			break;
7120 		    }
7121 
7122 		    /*
7123 		     * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
7124 		     * label.  If nothing is found, line up relative to the
7125 		     * switch label.
7126 		     *	    break;		<- may line up with this line
7127 		     *	 case xx:
7128 		     * ->   y = 1;
7129 		     */
7130 		    scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase    /* XXX */
7131 					? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
7132 		    lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
7133 		    continue;
7134 		}
7135 
7136 		/*
7137 		 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
7138 		 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
7139 		 */
7140 		if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
7141 		{
7142 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
7143 				    find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7144 		    {
7145 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7146 			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7147 		    }
7148 		    continue;
7149 		}
7150 
7151 		/*
7152 		 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
7153 		 */
7154 		if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
7155 		{
7156 		    l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
7157 		    if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
7158 			continue;
7159 		}
7160 
7161 		/*
7162 		 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
7163 		 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
7164 		 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
7165 		 * unlocked it)
7166 		 */
7167 		l = ml_get_curline();
7168 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
7169 							     || cin_nocode(l))
7170 		    continue;
7171 
7172 		/*
7173 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
7174 		 * constructor initialization?
7175 		 */						    /* XXX */
7176 		n = FALSE;
7177 		if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass > 0)
7178 		{
7179 		    n = cin_is_cpp_baseclass(&col);
7180 		    l = ml_get_curline();
7181 		}
7182 		if (n)
7183 		{
7184 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7185 		    {
7186 			if (cont_amount > 0)
7187 			    amount = cont_amount;
7188 			else
7189 			    amount += ind_continuation;
7190 		    }
7191 		    else if (theline[0] == '{')
7192 		    {
7193 			/* Need to find start of the declaration. */
7194 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7195 			ind_continuation = 0;
7196 			continue;
7197 		    }
7198 		    else
7199 								     /* XXX */
7200 			amount = get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen,
7201 					   ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass);
7202 		    break;
7203 		}
7204 		else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
7205 		{
7206 		    /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
7207 		     * declaration or initialization before the opening brace.
7208 		     */
7209 		    if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
7210 			break;
7211 		    else
7212 			continue;
7213 		}
7214 
7215 		/*
7216 		 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
7217 		 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
7218 		 * there is another unterminated statement behind, eg:
7219 		 *   123,
7220 		 *   sizeof
7221 		 *	  here
7222 		 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
7223 		 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
7224 		 * (indented).
7225 		 */
7226 		terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
7227 
7228 		if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7229 							&& terminated == ','))
7230 		{
7231 		    /*
7232 		     * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
7233 		     * go back to the line that starts it so
7234 		     * we can get the right prevailing indent
7235 		     *	   if ( foo &&
7236 		     *		    bar )
7237 		     */
7238 		    /*
7239 		     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7240 		     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7241 		     */
7242 		    (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7243 		    trypos = find_match_paren(
7244 				 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
7245 							      ind_maxcomment);
7246 
7247 		    /*
7248 		     * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
7249 		     * braces.
7250 		     */
7251 		    if (trypos == NULL && terminated == ','
7252 					      && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
7253 			trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
7254 
7255 		    if (trypos != NULL)
7256 		    {
7257 			/*
7258 			 * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
7259 			 * handled above.
7260 			 *     case xx:  if ( asdf &&
7261 			 *			asdf)
7262 			 */
7263 			curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
7264 			l = ml_get_curline();
7265 			if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7266 			{
7267 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7268 			    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7269 			    continue;
7270 			}
7271 		    }
7272 
7273 		    /*
7274 		     * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
7275 		     * indent from
7276 		     * char *usethis = "bla\
7277 		     *		 bla",
7278 		     *      here;
7279 		     */
7280 		    if (terminated == ',')
7281 		    {
7282 			while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7283 			{
7284 			    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7285 			    if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7286 				break;
7287 			    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7288 			    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7289 			}
7290 		    }
7291 
7292 		    /*
7293 		     * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7294 		     * ignoring any jump label.	    XXX
7295 		     */
7296 		    cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7297 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
7298 
7299 		    /*
7300 		     * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
7301 		     * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
7302 		     *		while (not)
7303 		     * ->	{
7304 		     *		}
7305 		     */
7306 		    if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
7307 							 && theline[0] == '{')
7308 		    {
7309 			amount = cur_amount;
7310 			/*
7311 			 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
7312 			 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
7313 			 * in the same line (scope is the same).  Probably:
7314 			 *	{ 1, 2 },
7315 			 * ->	{ 3, 4 }
7316 			 */
7317 			if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
7318 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7319 
7320 			if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
7321 			{
7322 			    /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
7323 			     * class declaration or initialization */
7324 			    lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7325 			    continue;
7326 			}
7327 			break;
7328 		    }
7329 
7330 		    /*
7331 		     * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
7332 		     * Also allow "   } else".
7333 		     */
7334 		    if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
7335 		    {
7336 			/*
7337 			 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
7338 			 * with the last one.
7339 			 *   if (cond)
7340 			 *	    100 +
7341 			 * ->		here;
7342 			 */
7343 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7344 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7345 			{
7346 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
7347 				amount = cont_amount;
7348 			    else
7349 				amount += ind_continuation;
7350 			    break;
7351 			}
7352 
7353 			/*
7354 			 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
7355 			 * are finished.
7356 			 *	    while (not)
7357 			 * ->		here;
7358 			 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
7359 			 * before this is terminated.
7360 			 *	yyy;
7361 			 *	if (stat)
7362 			 *	    while (not)
7363 			 *		xxx;
7364 			 * ->	here;
7365 			 */
7366 			amount = cur_amount;
7367 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7368 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7369 			if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7370 			{
7371 			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
7372 			    break;
7373 			}
7374 
7375 			/*
7376 			 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
7377 			 * do, line up with the while()
7378 			 *     do
7379 			 *	    x = 1;
7380 			 * ->  here
7381 			 */
7382 			l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
7383 			if (cin_isdo(l))
7384 			{
7385 			    if (whilelevel == 0)
7386 				break;
7387 			    --whilelevel;
7388 			}
7389 
7390 			/*
7391 			 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
7392 			 * one between the "if" and the "else".
7393 			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
7394 			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
7395 			 */
7396 			if (cin_iselse(l)
7397 				&& whilelevel == 0
7398 				&& ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7399 								    == NULL
7400 				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
7401 					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
7402 			    break;
7403 		    }
7404 
7405 		    /*
7406 		     * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
7407 		     * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
7408 		     * add something for a continuation line, depending on
7409 		     * the line before this one.
7410 		     */
7411 		    else
7412 		    {
7413 			/*
7414 			 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
7415 			 * the last one.
7416 			 *   c = 99 +
7417 			 *	    100 +
7418 			 * ->	    here;
7419 			 */
7420 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
7421 			{
7422 			    /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
7423 			    if (terminated == ',')
7424 				amount += ind_continuation;
7425 			    break;
7426 			}
7427 
7428 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7429 			{
7430 			    /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
7431 			     * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
7432 			     * declaration/initialization, if it is an
7433 			     * opening brace or we are looking just for
7434 			     * enumerations/initializations. */
7435 			    if (terminated == ',')
7436 			    {
7437 				if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
7438 				    break;
7439 
7440 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
7441 				continue;
7442 			    }
7443 
7444 			    /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
7445 			     * reduce indent. */
7446 			    if (amount > cur_amount)
7447 				amount = cur_amount;
7448 			}
7449 			else
7450 			{
7451 			    /*
7452 			     * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
7453 			     * line up with this line, remember its indent
7454 			     *	    100 +
7455 			     * ->	    here;
7456 			     */
7457 			    amount = cur_amount;
7458 
7459 			    /*
7460 			     * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
7461 			     * are in an initialization or enum
7462 			     * struct xxx =
7463 			     * {
7464 			     *      sizeof a,
7465 			     *      124 };
7466 			     * or a normal possible continuation line.
7467 			     * but only, of no other statement has been found
7468 			     * yet.
7469 			     */
7470 			    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
7471 			    {
7472 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
7473 				cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7474 			    }
7475 			    else
7476 			    {
7477 				if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7478 					&& *l != NUL
7479 					&& l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7480 								/* XXX */
7481 				    cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7482 						       curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7483 				if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7484 				    lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7485 			    }
7486 			}
7487 		    }
7488 		}
7489 
7490 		/*
7491 		 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7492 		 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7493 		 */
7494 							/* XXX */
7495 		else if (cin_iswhileofdo_end(terminated, ind_maxparen,
7496 							      ind_maxcomment))
7497 		{
7498 		    /*
7499 		     * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7500 		     * with the last one.
7501 		     *	    while (cond);
7502 		     *	    100 +		<- line up with this one
7503 		     * ->	    here;
7504 		     */
7505 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7506 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7507 		    {
7508 			if (cont_amount > 0)
7509 			    amount = cont_amount;
7510 			else
7511 			    amount += ind_continuation;
7512 			break;
7513 		    }
7514 
7515 		    if (whilelevel == 0)
7516 		    {
7517 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7518 			amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7519 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7520 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7521 		    }
7522 		    ++whilelevel;
7523 		}
7524 
7525 		/*
7526 		 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7527 		 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7528 		 * indent of that other statement.
7529 		 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7530 		 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7531 		 */
7532 		else
7533 		{
7534 		    /*
7535 		     * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7536 		     * may be lined up with the case label.
7537 		     */
7538 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7539 				  && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7540 		    {
7541 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7542 			continue;
7543 		    }
7544 
7545 		    /*
7546 		     * Handle "do {" line.
7547 		     */
7548 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
7549 		    {
7550 			l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7551 			if (cin_isdo(l))
7552 			{
7553 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
7554 			    --whilelevel;
7555 			    continue;
7556 			}
7557 		    }
7558 
7559 		    /*
7560 		     * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7561 		     * the amount for a continuation line.
7562 		     *	 x = 1;
7563 		     *	 y = foo +
7564 		     * ->	here;
7565 		     * or
7566 		     *	 int x = 1;
7567 		     *	 int foo,
7568 		     * ->	here;
7569 		     */
7570 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7571 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7572 		    {
7573 			if (cont_amount > 0)
7574 			    amount = cont_amount;
7575 			else
7576 			    amount += ind_continuation;
7577 			break;
7578 		    }
7579 
7580 		    /*
7581 		     * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7582 		     * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7583 		     *	 x = 1;				x = 1;
7584 		     *	 if (asdf)		    y = 2;
7585 		     *	     while (asdf)	  ->here;
7586 		     *		here;
7587 		     * ->foo;
7588 		     */
7589 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7590 		    {
7591 			if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7592 			    break;
7593 		    }
7594 
7595 		    /*
7596 		     * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7597 		     * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7598 		     * a terminated line.
7599 		     */
7600 		    else
7601 		    {
7602 			/*
7603 			 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7604 			 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7605 			 * the line.  Helps for:
7606 			 *     func(asdr,
7607 			 *	      asdfasdf);
7608 			 *     here;
7609 			 */
7610 term_again:
7611 			l = ml_get_curline();
7612 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7613 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7614 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7615 			{
7616 			    /*
7617 			     * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
7618 			     * handled above.
7619 			     *	   case xx:  if ( asdf &&
7620 			     *			    asdf)
7621 			     */
7622 			    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
7623 			    l = ml_get_curline();
7624 			    if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7625 			    {
7626 				++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7627 				curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7628 				continue;
7629 			    }
7630 			}
7631 
7632 			/* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7633 			 * with a statement after it.
7634 			 *  case 1: {   <-- don't use this { position
7635 			 *	stat;
7636 			 *  }
7637 			 *  case 2:
7638 			 *	stat;
7639 			 * }
7640 			 */
7641 			iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7642 
7643 			/*
7644 			 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7645 			 * ignoring any jump label.
7646 			 */
7647 			amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7648 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
7649 
7650 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7651 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7652 			/* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7653 			l = skipwhite(l);
7654 			if (*l == '{')
7655 			    amount -= ind_open_extra;
7656 			lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7657 
7658 			/*
7659 			 * When a terminated line starts with "else" skip to
7660 			 * the matching "if":
7661 			 *       else 3;
7662 			 *	     indent this;
7663 			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
7664 			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
7665 			 */
7666 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM
7667 				&& *l != '}'
7668 				&& cin_iselse(l)
7669 				&& whilelevel == 0)
7670 			{
7671 			    if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7672 								       == NULL
7673 				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
7674 					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL)
7675 				break;
7676 			    continue;
7677 			}
7678 
7679 			/*
7680 			 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7681 			 * that block.
7682 			 */
7683 			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7684 			if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7685 				&& (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7686 							    != NULL) /* XXX */
7687 			{
7688 			    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
7689 			    /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7690 			    /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7691 			    l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7692 			    if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7693 				goto term_again;
7694 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7695 			    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7696 			}
7697 		    }
7698 		}
7699 	    }
7700 	}
7701       }
7702 
7703       /* add extra indent for a comment */
7704       if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7705 	  amount += ind_comment;
7706     }
7707 
7708     /*
7709      * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7710      *
7711      * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7712      * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7713      * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7714      * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7715      */
7716     else
7717     {
7718 	/*
7719 	 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7720 	 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7721 	 * of a function
7722 	 */
7723 
7724 	if (theline[0] == '{')
7725 	{
7726 	    amount = ind_first_open;
7727 	}
7728 
7729 	/*
7730 	 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7731 	 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7732 	 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment or if the
7733 	 * current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';', or if the current line
7734 	 * contains { or }: "void f() {\n if (1)"
7735 	 */
7736 	else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7737 		&& !cin_nocode(theline)
7738 		&& vim_strchr(theline, '{') == NULL
7739 		&& vim_strchr(theline, '}') == NULL
7740 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7741 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7742 		&& cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7743 		&& !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7744 	{
7745 	    amount = ind_func_type;
7746 	}
7747 	else
7748 	{
7749 	    amount = 0;
7750 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7751 
7752 	    /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7753 
7754 	    while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7755 	    {
7756 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7757 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7758 
7759 		l = ml_get_curline();
7760 
7761 		/*
7762 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7763 		 */						/* XXX */
7764 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7765 		{
7766 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7767 		    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7768 		    continue;
7769 		}
7770 
7771 		/*
7772 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
7773 		 * constructor initialization?
7774 		 */						    /* XXX */
7775 		n = FALSE;
7776 		if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{')
7777 		{
7778 		    n = cin_is_cpp_baseclass(&col);
7779 		    l = ml_get_curline();
7780 		}
7781 		if (n)
7782 		{
7783 								     /* XXX */
7784 		    amount = get_baseclass_amount(col, ind_maxparen,
7785 					   ind_maxcomment, ind_cpp_baseclass);
7786 		    break;
7787 		}
7788 
7789 		/*
7790 		 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7791 		 */
7792 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7793 		    continue;
7794 
7795 		if (cin_nocode(l))
7796 		    continue;
7797 
7798 		/*
7799 		 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7800 		 * indentation:
7801 		 * int foo,
7802 		 *     bar;
7803 		 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7804 		 * enum foobar
7805 		 * {
7806 		 *   ...
7807 		 * } foo,
7808 		 *   bar;
7809 		 */
7810 		n = 0;
7811 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7812 			     || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7813 		{
7814 		    /* take us back to opening paren */
7815 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7816 			    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7817 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7818 			curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
7819 
7820 		    /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7821 		     * back to the first line with a backslash:
7822 		     * char *foo = "bla\
7823 		     *		 bla",
7824 		     *      here;
7825 		     */
7826 		    while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7827 		    {
7828 			l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7829 			if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7830 			    break;
7831 			--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7832 			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7833 		    }
7834 
7835 		    amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7836 
7837 		    if (amount == 0)
7838 			amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7839 		    if (amount == 0)
7840 			amount = ind_continuation;
7841 		    break;
7842 		}
7843 
7844 		/*
7845 		 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7846 		 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7847 		 */
7848 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum))  /* XXX */
7849 		    break;
7850 		l = ml_get_curline();
7851 
7852 		/*
7853 		 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function.  Put
7854 		 * current line at the left margin.  For when 'cino' has "fs".
7855 		 */
7856 		if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7857 		    break;
7858 
7859 		/*			    (matching {)
7860 		 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7861 		 * comments) align at column 0.  For example:
7862 		 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7863 		 *     / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7864 		 */
7865 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7866 		    break;
7867 
7868 		/*
7869 		 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7870 		 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7871 		 * parameters.
7872 		 */
7873 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7874 		{
7875 		    amount = ind_param;
7876 		    break;
7877 		}
7878 
7879 		/*
7880 		 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7881 		 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7882 		 * int foo,
7883 		 *     bar;
7884 		 * indent_to_0 here;
7885 		 */
7886 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)";", NULL))
7887 		{
7888 		    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7889 		    if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7890 			    || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7891 			break;
7892 		    l = ml_get_curline();
7893 		}
7894 
7895 		/*
7896 		 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7897 		 * use the indent of this line.
7898 		 *
7899 		 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7900 		 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7901 		 */
7902 		find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7903 
7904 		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7905 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7906 		    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
7907 		amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7908 		break;
7909 	    }
7910 
7911 	    /* add extra indent for a comment */
7912 	    if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7913 		amount += ind_comment;
7914 
7915 	    /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7916 	     *	      "asdfasdf\
7917 	     *		  here";
7918 	     *	    char *foo = "asdf\
7919 	     *			 here";
7920 	     */
7921 	    if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7922 	    {
7923 		l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7924 		if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7925 		{
7926 		    cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7927 		    if (cur_amount > 0)
7928 			amount = cur_amount;
7929 		    else if (cur_amount == 0)
7930 			amount += ind_continuation;
7931 		}
7932 	    }
7933 	}
7934     }
7935 
7936 theend:
7937     /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7938     curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7939 
7940     vim_free(linecopy);
7941 
7942     if (amount < 0)
7943 	return 0;
7944     return amount;
7945 }
7946 
7947     static int
7948 find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7949     int		lookfor;
7950     linenr_T	ourscope;
7951     int		ind_maxparen;
7952     int		ind_maxcomment;
7953 {
7954     char_u	*look;
7955     pos_T	*theirscope;
7956     char_u	*mightbeif;
7957     int		elselevel;
7958     int		whilelevel;
7959 
7960     if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7961     {
7962 	elselevel = 1;
7963 	whilelevel = 0;
7964     }
7965     else
7966     {
7967 	elselevel = 0;
7968 	whilelevel = 1;
7969     }
7970 
7971     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7972 
7973     while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7974     {
7975 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7976 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7977 
7978 	look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7979 	if (cin_iselse(look)
7980 		|| cin_isif(look)
7981 		|| cin_isdo(look)			    /* XXX */
7982 		|| cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7983 	{
7984 	    /*
7985 	     * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7986 	     * we must be out of scope...
7987 	     */
7988 	    theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);  /* XXX */
7989 	    if (theirscope == NULL)
7990 		break;
7991 
7992 	    /*
7993 	     * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7994 	     * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7995 	     * out of luck too.
7996 	     */
7997 	    if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7998 		break;
7999 
8000 	    /*
8001 	     * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
8002 	     * then we can ignore it because it's in a
8003 	     * different scope...
8004 	     */
8005 	    if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
8006 		continue;
8007 
8008 	    /*
8009 	     * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
8010 	     * then we need to go back to another if, so
8011 	     * increment elselevel
8012 	     */
8013 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
8014 	    if (cin_iselse(look))
8015 	    {
8016 		mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
8017 		if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
8018 		    ++elselevel;
8019 		continue;
8020 	    }
8021 
8022 	    /*
8023 	     * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
8024 	     * another "do", so increment whilelevel.  XXX
8025 	     */
8026 	    if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
8027 	    {
8028 		++whilelevel;
8029 		continue;
8030 	    }
8031 
8032 	    /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
8033 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
8034 	    if (cin_isif(look))
8035 	    {
8036 		elselevel--;
8037 		/*
8038 		 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
8039 		 * get in the way.
8040 		 */
8041 		if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
8042 		    whilelevel = 0;
8043 	    }
8044 
8045 	    /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
8046 	    if (cin_isdo(look))
8047 		whilelevel--;
8048 
8049 	    /*
8050 	     * if we've used up all the elses, then
8051 	     * this must be the if that we want!
8052 	     * match the indent level of that if.
8053 	     */
8054 	    if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
8055 	    {
8056 		return OK;
8057 	    }
8058 	}
8059     }
8060     return FAIL;
8061 }
8062 
8063 # if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8064 /*
8065  * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
8066  */
8067     int
8068 get_expr_indent()
8069 {
8070     int		indent;
8071     pos_T	pos;
8072     int		save_State;
8073     int		use_sandbox = was_set_insecurely((char_u *)"indentexpr",
8074 								   OPT_LOCAL);
8075 
8076     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
8077     set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
8078     if (use_sandbox)
8079 	++sandbox;
8080     ++textlock;
8081     indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
8082     if (use_sandbox)
8083 	--sandbox;
8084     --textlock;
8085 
8086     /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
8087      * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
8088      * command. */
8089     save_State = State;
8090     State = INSERT;
8091     curwin->w_cursor = pos;
8092     check_cursor();
8093     State = save_State;
8094 
8095     /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
8096     if (indent < 0)
8097 	indent = get_indent();
8098 
8099     return indent;
8100 }
8101 # endif
8102 
8103 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
8104 
8105 #if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
8106 
8107 static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
8108 
8109     static int
8110 lisp_match(p)
8111     char_u	*p;
8112 {
8113     char_u	buf[LSIZE];
8114     int		len;
8115     char_u	*word = p_lispwords;
8116 
8117     while (*word != NUL)
8118     {
8119 	(void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
8120 	len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8121 	if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
8122 	    return TRUE;
8123     }
8124     return FALSE;
8125 }
8126 
8127 /*
8128  * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
8129  * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
8130  * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
8131  * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, [email protected]
8132  *
8133  * TODO:
8134  * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
8135  * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
8136  * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
8137  * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
8138  * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
8139  * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
8140  * Update from Sergey Khorev:
8141  * I tried to fix the first two issues.
8142  */
8143     int
8144 get_lisp_indent()
8145 {
8146     pos_T	*pos, realpos, paren;
8147     int		amount;
8148     char_u	*that;
8149     colnr_T	col;
8150     colnr_T	firsttry;
8151     int		parencount, quotecount;
8152     int		vi_lisp;
8153 
8154     /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
8155     vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
8156 
8157     realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
8158     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
8159 
8160     if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
8161 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
8162     else
8163     {
8164 	paren = *pos;
8165 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
8166 	if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
8167 	    pos = &paren;
8168     }
8169     if (pos != NULL)
8170     {
8171 	/* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
8172 	 * line that is at the same () level. */
8173 	amount = -1;
8174 	parencount = 0;
8175 
8176 	while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
8177 	{
8178 	    if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
8179 		continue;
8180 	    for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
8181 	    {
8182 		if (*that == ';')
8183 		{
8184 		    while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
8185 			++that;
8186 		    continue;
8187 		}
8188 		if (*that == '\\')
8189 		{
8190 		    if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
8191 			++that;
8192 		    continue;
8193 		}
8194 		if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
8195 		{
8196 		    while (*++that && *that != '"')
8197 		    {
8198 			/* skipping escaped characters in the string */
8199 			if (*that == '\\')
8200 			{
8201 			    if (*++that == NUL)
8202 				break;
8203 			    if (that[1] == NUL)
8204 			    {
8205 				++that;
8206 				break;
8207 			    }
8208 			}
8209 		    }
8210 		}
8211 		if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
8212 		    ++parencount;
8213 		else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
8214 		    --parencount;
8215 	    }
8216 	    if (parencount == 0)
8217 	    {
8218 		amount = get_indent();
8219 		break;
8220 	    }
8221 	}
8222 
8223 	if (amount == -1)
8224 	{
8225 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
8226 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
8227 	    col = pos->col;
8228 
8229 	    that = ml_get_curline();
8230 
8231 	    if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
8232 		amount = 2;
8233 	    else
8234 	    {
8235 		amount = 0;
8236 		while (*that && col)
8237 		{
8238 		    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
8239 		    col--;
8240 		}
8241 
8242 		/*
8243 		 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
8244 		 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
8245 		 *
8246 		 * (let ((a 1))    instead    (let ((a 1))
8247 		 *   (...))	      of	   (...))
8248 		 */
8249 
8250 		if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
8251 						      && lisp_match(that + 1))
8252 		    amount += 2;
8253 		else
8254 		{
8255 		    that++;
8256 		    amount++;
8257 		    firsttry = amount;
8258 
8259 		    while (vim_iswhite(*that))
8260 		    {
8261 			amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
8262 			++that;
8263 		    }
8264 
8265 		    if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
8266 		    {
8267 			/* test *that != '(' to accommodate first let/do
8268 			 * argument if it is more than one line */
8269 			if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
8270 			    firsttry++;
8271 
8272 			parencount = 0;
8273 			quotecount = 0;
8274 
8275 			if (vi_lisp
8276 				|| (*that != '"'
8277 				    && *that != '\''
8278 				    && *that != '#'
8279 				    && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
8280 			{
8281 			    while (*that
8282 				    && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
8283 					|| quotecount
8284 					|| parencount)
8285 				    && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
8286 					    && !quotecount
8287 					    && !parencount
8288 					    && vi_lisp)))
8289 			    {
8290 				if (*that == '"')
8291 				    quotecount = !quotecount;
8292 				if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
8293 							       && !quotecount)
8294 				    ++parencount;
8295 				if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
8296 							       && !quotecount)
8297 				    --parencount;
8298 				if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
8299 				    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
8300 							     (colnr_T)amount);
8301 				amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
8302 							     (colnr_T)amount);
8303 			    }
8304 			}
8305 			while (vim_iswhite(*that))
8306 			{
8307 			    amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
8308 			    that++;
8309 			}
8310 			if (!*that || *that == ';')
8311 			    amount = firsttry;
8312 		    }
8313 		}
8314 	    }
8315 	}
8316     }
8317     else
8318 	amount = 0;	/* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
8319 
8320     curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
8321 
8322     return amount;
8323 }
8324 #endif /* FEAT_LISP */
8325 
8326     void
8327 prepare_to_exit()
8328 {
8329 #if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
8330     /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
8331      * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
8332      * problems. */
8333     signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
8334 #endif
8335 
8336 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
8337     if (gui.in_use)
8338     {
8339 	gui.dying = TRUE;
8340 	out_trash();	/* trash any pending output */
8341     }
8342     else
8343 #endif
8344     {
8345 	windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
8346 
8347 	/*
8348 	 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
8349 	 * screen (if there are two screens).
8350 	 */
8351 	settmode(TMODE_COOK);
8352 #ifdef WIN3264
8353 	if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
8354 #endif
8355 	    stoptermcap();
8356 	out_flush();
8357     }
8358 }
8359 
8360 /*
8361  * Preserve files and exit.
8362  * When called IObuff must contain a message.
8363  */
8364     void
8365 preserve_exit()
8366 {
8367     buf_T	*buf;
8368 
8369     prepare_to_exit();
8370 
8371     /* Setting this will prevent free() calls.  That avoids calling free()
8372      * recursively when free() was invoked with a bad pointer. */
8373     really_exiting = TRUE;
8374 
8375     out_str(IObuff);
8376     screen_start();		    /* don't know where cursor is now */
8377     out_flush();
8378 
8379     ml_close_notmod();		    /* close all not-modified buffers */
8380 
8381     for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
8382     {
8383 	if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
8384 	{
8385 	    OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
8386 	    screen_start();	    /* don't know where cursor is now */
8387 	    out_flush();
8388 	    ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE);	/* preserve all swap files */
8389 	    break;
8390 	}
8391     }
8392 
8393     ml_close_all(FALSE);	    /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
8394 
8395     OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
8396 
8397     getout(1);
8398 }
8399 
8400 /*
8401  * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
8402  */
8403     int
8404 vim_fexists(fname)
8405     char_u  *fname;
8406 {
8407     struct stat st;
8408 
8409     if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
8410 	return FALSE;
8411     return TRUE;
8412 }
8413 
8414 /*
8415  * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
8416  * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
8417  * each line in the file.  Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
8418  * time, because it can be a system call.
8419  */
8420 
8421 #ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
8422 # ifdef FEAT_GUI		    /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
8423 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
8424 # else
8425 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
8426 # endif
8427 #endif
8428 
8429 static int	breakcheck_count = 0;
8430 
8431     void
8432 line_breakcheck()
8433 {
8434     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
8435     {
8436 	breakcheck_count = 0;
8437 	ui_breakcheck();
8438     }
8439 }
8440 
8441 /*
8442  * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
8443  */
8444     void
8445 fast_breakcheck()
8446 {
8447     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
8448     {
8449 	breakcheck_count = 0;
8450 	ui_breakcheck();
8451     }
8452 }
8453 
8454 /*
8455  * Invoke expand_wildcards() for one pattern.
8456  * Expand items like "%:h" before the expansion.
8457  * Returns OK or FAIL.
8458  */
8459     int
8460 expand_wildcards_eval(pat, num_file, file, flags)
8461     char_u	 **pat;		/* pointer to input pattern */
8462     int		  *num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
8463     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
8464     int		   flags;	/* EW_DIR, etc. */
8465 {
8466     int		ret = FAIL;
8467     char_u	*eval_pat = NULL;
8468     char_u	*exp_pat = *pat;
8469     char_u      *ignored_msg;
8470     int		usedlen;
8471 
8472     if (*exp_pat == '%' || *exp_pat == '#' || *exp_pat == '<')
8473     {
8474 	++emsg_off;
8475 	eval_pat = eval_vars(exp_pat, exp_pat, &usedlen,
8476 						    NULL, &ignored_msg, NULL);
8477 	--emsg_off;
8478 	if (eval_pat != NULL)
8479 	    exp_pat = concat_str(eval_pat, exp_pat + usedlen);
8480     }
8481 
8482     if (exp_pat != NULL)
8483 	ret = expand_wildcards(1, &exp_pat, num_file, file, flags);
8484 
8485     if (eval_pat != NULL)
8486     {
8487 	vim_free(exp_pat);
8488 	vim_free(eval_pat);
8489     }
8490 
8491     return ret;
8492 }
8493 
8494 /*
8495  * Expand wildcards.  Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
8496  * 'wildignore'.
8497  * Returns OK or FAIL.
8498  */
8499     int
8500 expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8501     int		   num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
8502     char_u	 **pat;		/* array of input patterns */
8503     int		  *num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
8504     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
8505     int		   flags;	/* EW_DIR, etc. */
8506 {
8507     int		retval;
8508     int		i, j;
8509     char_u	*p;
8510     int		non_suf_match;	/* number without matching suffix */
8511 
8512     retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8513 
8514     /* When keeping all matches, return here */
8515     if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
8516 	return retval;
8517 
8518 #ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
8519     /*
8520      * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
8521      */
8522     if (*p_wig)
8523     {
8524 	char_u	*ffname;
8525 
8526 	/* check all files in (*file)[] */
8527 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8528 	{
8529 	    ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
8530 	    if (ffname == NULL)		/* out of memory */
8531 		break;
8532 # ifdef VMS
8533 	    vms_remove_version(ffname);
8534 # endif
8535 	    if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
8536 	    {
8537 		/* remove this matching file from the list */
8538 		vim_free((*file)[i]);
8539 		for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
8540 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
8541 		--*num_file;
8542 		--i;
8543 	    }
8544 	    vim_free(ffname);
8545 	}
8546     }
8547 #endif
8548 
8549     /*
8550      * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
8551      */
8552     if (*num_file > 1)
8553     {
8554 	non_suf_match = 0;
8555 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8556 	{
8557 	    if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
8558 	    {
8559 		/*
8560 		 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8561 		 * of the list.
8562 		 */
8563 		p = (*file)[i];
8564 		for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8565 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8566 		(*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8567 	    }
8568 	}
8569     }
8570 
8571     return retval;
8572 }
8573 
8574 /*
8575  * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8576  */
8577     int
8578 match_suffix(fname)
8579     char_u	*fname;
8580 {
8581     int		fnamelen, setsuflen;
8582     char_u	*setsuf;
8583 #define MAXSUFLEN 30	    /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8584     char_u	suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8585 
8586     fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8587     setsuflen = 0;
8588     for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8589     {
8590 	setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8591 	if (setsuflen == 0)
8592 	{
8593 	    char_u *tail = gettail(fname);
8594 
8595 	    /* empty entry: match name without a '.' */
8596 	    if (vim_strchr(tail, '.') == NULL)
8597 	    {
8598 		setsuflen = 1;
8599 		break;
8600 	    }
8601 	}
8602 	else
8603 	{
8604 	    if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8605 		    && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8606 						  (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8607 		break;
8608 	    setsuflen = 0;
8609 	}
8610     }
8611     return (setsuflen != 0);
8612 }
8613 
8614 #if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8615 
8616 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8617 static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8618 static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8619 # endif
8620 
8621 # if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8622 /*
8623  * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32.  It's here because
8624  * it's shared between these systems.
8625  */
8626 # if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8627 #  define _cdecl	    /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8628 # else
8629 #  ifdef __BORLANDC__
8630 #   define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8631 #  endif
8632 # endif
8633 
8634 /*
8635  * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8636  */
8637     static int _cdecl
8638 pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8639 {
8640     return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
8641 }
8642 
8643 # ifndef WIN3264
8644     static void
8645 namelowcpy(
8646     char_u *d,
8647     char_u *s)
8648 {
8649 #  ifdef DJGPP
8650     if (USE_LONG_FNAME)	    /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8651 	while (*s)
8652 	    *d++ = *s++;
8653     else
8654 #  endif
8655 	while (*s)
8656 	    *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8657     *d = NUL;
8658 }
8659 # endif
8660 
8661 /*
8662  * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8663  * directories.  Adds matches to "gap".  Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
8664  * Return the number of matches found.
8665  * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8666  * at "path[wildoff]".
8667  * Return the number of matches found.
8668  * NOTE: much of this is identical to unix_expandpath(), keep in sync!
8669  */
8670     static int
8671 dos_expandpath(
8672     garray_T	*gap,
8673     char_u	*path,
8674     int		wildoff,
8675     int		flags,		/* EW_* flags */
8676     int		didstar)	/* expanded "**" once already */
8677 {
8678     char_u	*buf;
8679     char_u	*path_end;
8680     char_u	*p, *s, *e;
8681     int		start_len = gap->ga_len;
8682     char_u	*pat;
8683     regmatch_T	regmatch;
8684     int		starts_with_dot;
8685     int		matches;
8686     int		len;
8687     int		starstar = FALSE;
8688     static int	stardepth = 0;	    /* depth for "**" expansion */
8689 #ifdef WIN3264
8690     WIN32_FIND_DATA	fb;
8691     HANDLE		hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8692 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8693     WIN32_FIND_DATAW    wfb;
8694     WCHAR		*wn = NULL;	/* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8695 # endif
8696 #else
8697     struct ffblk	fb;
8698 #endif
8699     char_u		*matchname;
8700     int			ok;
8701 
8702     /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
8703     if (stardepth > 0)
8704     {
8705 	ui_breakcheck();
8706 	if (got_int)
8707 	    return 0;
8708     }
8709 
8710     /* make room for file name */
8711     buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8712     if (buf == NULL)
8713 	return 0;
8714 
8715     /*
8716      * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8717      * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8718      */
8719     p = buf;
8720     s = buf;
8721     e = NULL;
8722     path_end = path;
8723     while (*path_end != NUL)
8724     {
8725 	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8726 	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8727 	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8728 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8729 	else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8730 	{
8731 	    if (e != NULL)
8732 		break;
8733 	    s = p + 1;
8734 	}
8735 	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8736 			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8737 	    e = p;
8738 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8739 	if (has_mbyte)
8740 	{
8741 	    len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
8742 	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8743 	    p += len;
8744 	    path_end += len;
8745 	}
8746 	else
8747 #endif
8748 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
8749     }
8750     e = p;
8751     *e = NUL;
8752 
8753     /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8754     /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8755      * component. */
8756     for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8757 	if (rem_backslash(p))
8758 	{
8759 	    STRMOVE(p, p + 1);
8760 	    --e;
8761 	    --s;
8762 	}
8763 
8764     /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
8765     for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
8766 	if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
8767 	    starstar = TRUE;
8768 
8769     starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8770     pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8771     if (pat == NULL)
8772     {
8773 	vim_free(buf);
8774 	return 0;
8775     }
8776 
8777     /* compile the regexp into a program */
8778     regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Always ignore case */
8779     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8780     vim_free(pat);
8781 
8782     if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8783     {
8784 	vim_free(buf);
8785 	return 0;
8786     }
8787 
8788     /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8789     matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8790 
8791     /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
8792      * is following then find matches without any directory. */
8793     if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
8794 							  && *path_end == '/')
8795     {
8796 	STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
8797 	++stardepth;
8798 	(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
8799 	--stardepth;
8800     }
8801 
8802     /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8803     STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8804 #ifdef WIN3264
8805 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8806     if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8807     {
8808 	/* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'.  Attempt using the
8809 	 * wide function.  If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8810 	 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8811 	wn = enc_to_utf16(buf, NULL);
8812 	if (wn != NULL)
8813 	{
8814 	    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8815 	    if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8816 			      && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8817 	    {
8818 		vim_free(wn);
8819 		wn = NULL;
8820 	    }
8821 	}
8822     }
8823 
8824     if (wn == NULL)
8825 # endif
8826 	hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8827     ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8828 #else
8829     /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8830     ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8831 		(*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8832 #endif
8833 
8834     while (ok)
8835     {
8836 #ifdef WIN3264
8837 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8838 	if (wn != NULL)
8839 	    p = utf16_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL);   /* p is allocated here */
8840 	else
8841 # endif
8842 	    p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8843 #else
8844 	p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8845 #endif
8846 	/* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for.  Accept
8847 	 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8848 	if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8849 		&& (matchname == NULL
8850 		    || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8851 	{
8852 #ifdef WIN3264
8853 	    STRCPY(s, p);
8854 #else
8855 	    namelowcpy(s, p);
8856 #endif
8857 	    len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8858 
8859 	    if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
8860 	    {
8861 		/* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
8862 		 * find matches. */
8863 		STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
8864 		STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
8865 		++stardepth;
8866 		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
8867 		--stardepth;
8868 	    }
8869 
8870 	    STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8871 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8872 	    {
8873 		/* need to expand another component of the path */
8874 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8875 		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
8876 	    }
8877 	    else
8878 	    {
8879 		/* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8880 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8881 		if (*path_end != 0)
8882 		    backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8883 		if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
8884 		    addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8885 	    }
8886 	}
8887 
8888 #ifdef WIN3264
8889 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8890 	if (wn != NULL)
8891 	{
8892 	    vim_free(p);
8893 	    ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8894 	}
8895 	else
8896 # endif
8897 	    ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8898 #else
8899 	ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8900 #endif
8901 
8902 	/* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8903 	 * itself.  Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8904 	if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8905 	{
8906 	    STRCPY(s, matchname);
8907 #ifdef WIN3264
8908 	    FindClose(hFind);
8909 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8910 	    if (wn != NULL)
8911 	    {
8912 		vim_free(wn);
8913 		wn = enc_to_utf16(buf, NULL);
8914 		if (wn != NULL)
8915 		    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8916 	    }
8917 	    if (wn == NULL)
8918 # endif
8919 		hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8920 	    ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8921 #else
8922 	    ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8923 		 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8924 #endif
8925 	    vim_free(matchname);
8926 	    matchname = NULL;
8927 	}
8928     }
8929 
8930 #ifdef WIN3264
8931     FindClose(hFind);
8932 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8933     vim_free(wn);
8934 # endif
8935 #endif
8936     vim_free(buf);
8937     vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8938     vim_free(matchname);
8939 
8940     matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8941     if (matches > 0)
8942 	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8943 						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8944     return matches;
8945 }
8946 
8947     int
8948 mch_expandpath(
8949     garray_T	*gap,
8950     char_u	*path,
8951     int		flags)		/* EW_* flags */
8952 {
8953     return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags, FALSE);
8954 }
8955 # endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8956 
8957 #if (defined(UNIX) && !defined(VMS)) || defined(USE_UNIXFILENAME) \
8958 	|| defined(PROTO)
8959 /*
8960  * Unix style wildcard expansion code.
8961  * It's here because it's used both for Unix and Mac.
8962  */
8963 static int	pstrcmp __ARGS((const void *, const void *));
8964 
8965     static int
8966 pstrcmp(a, b)
8967     const void *a, *b;
8968 {
8969     return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
8970 }
8971 
8972 /*
8973  * Recursively expand one path component into all matching files and/or
8974  * directories.  Adds matches to "gap".  Handles "*", "?", "[a-z]", "**", etc.
8975  * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8976  * at "path + wildoff".
8977  * Return the number of matches found.
8978  * NOTE: much of this is identical to dos_expandpath(), keep in sync!
8979  */
8980     int
8981 unix_expandpath(gap, path, wildoff, flags, didstar)
8982     garray_T	*gap;
8983     char_u	*path;
8984     int		wildoff;
8985     int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
8986     int		didstar;	/* expanded "**" once already */
8987 {
8988     char_u	*buf;
8989     char_u	*path_end;
8990     char_u	*p, *s, *e;
8991     int		start_len = gap->ga_len;
8992     char_u	*pat;
8993     regmatch_T	regmatch;
8994     int		starts_with_dot;
8995     int		matches;
8996     int		len;
8997     int		starstar = FALSE;
8998     static int	stardepth = 0;	    /* depth for "**" expansion */
8999 
9000     DIR		*dirp;
9001     struct dirent *dp;
9002 
9003     /* Expanding "**" may take a long time, check for CTRL-C. */
9004     if (stardepth > 0)
9005     {
9006 	ui_breakcheck();
9007 	if (got_int)
9008 	    return 0;
9009     }
9010 
9011     /* make room for file name */
9012     buf = alloc((int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
9013     if (buf == NULL)
9014 	return 0;
9015 
9016     /*
9017      * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard.
9018      * Copy it into "buf", including the preceding characters.
9019      */
9020     p = buf;
9021     s = buf;
9022     e = NULL;
9023     path_end = path;
9024     while (*path_end != NUL)
9025     {
9026 	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
9027 	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
9028 	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
9029 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
9030 	else if (*path_end == '/')
9031 	{
9032 	    if (e != NULL)
9033 		break;
9034 	    s = p + 1;
9035 	}
9036 	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
9037 			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[{~$", *path_end) != NULL)
9038 	    e = p;
9039 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
9040 	if (has_mbyte)
9041 	{
9042 	    len = (*mb_ptr2len)(path_end);
9043 	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
9044 	    p += len;
9045 	    path_end += len;
9046 	}
9047 	else
9048 #endif
9049 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
9050     }
9051     e = p;
9052     *e = NUL;
9053 
9054     /* now we have one wildcard component between "s" and "e" */
9055     /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
9056      * component. */
9057     for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
9058 	if (rem_backslash(p))
9059 	{
9060 	    STRMOVE(p, p + 1);
9061 	    --e;
9062 	    --s;
9063 	}
9064 
9065     /* Check for "**" between "s" and "e". */
9066     for (p = s; p < e; ++p)
9067 	if (p[0] == '*' && p[1] == '*')
9068 	    starstar = TRUE;
9069 
9070     /* convert the file pattern to a regexp pattern */
9071     starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
9072     pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
9073     if (pat == NULL)
9074     {
9075 	vim_free(buf);
9076 	return 0;
9077     }
9078 
9079     /* compile the regexp into a program */
9080 #ifdef CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME
9081     regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Behave like Terminal.app */
9082 #else
9083     regmatch.rm_ic = FALSE;		/* Don't ever ignore case */
9084 #endif
9085     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
9086     vim_free(pat);
9087 
9088     if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
9089     {
9090 	vim_free(buf);
9091 	return 0;
9092     }
9093 
9094     /* If "**" is by itself, this is the first time we encounter it and more
9095      * is following then find matches without any directory. */
9096     if (!didstar && stardepth < 100 && starstar && e - s == 2
9097 							  && *path_end == '/')
9098     {
9099 	STRCPY(s, path_end + 1);
9100 	++stardepth;
9101 	(void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, (int)(s - buf), flags, TRUE);
9102 	--stardepth;
9103     }
9104 
9105     /* open the directory for scanning */
9106     *s = NUL;
9107     dirp = opendir(*buf == NUL ? "." : (char *)buf);
9108 
9109     /* Find all matching entries */
9110     if (dirp != NULL)
9111     {
9112 	for (;;)
9113 	{
9114 	    dp = readdir(dirp);
9115 	    if (dp == NULL)
9116 		break;
9117 	    if ((dp->d_name[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
9118 		    && vim_regexec(&regmatch, (char_u *)dp->d_name, (colnr_T)0))
9119 	    {
9120 		STRCPY(s, dp->d_name);
9121 		len = STRLEN(buf);
9122 
9123 		if (starstar && stardepth < 100)
9124 		{
9125 		    /* For "**" in the pattern first go deeper in the tree to
9126 		     * find matches. */
9127 		    STRCPY(buf + len, "/**");
9128 		    STRCPY(buf + len + 3, path_end);
9129 		    ++stardepth;
9130 		    (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, TRUE);
9131 		    --stardepth;
9132 		}
9133 
9134 		STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
9135 		if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end)) /* handle more wildcards */
9136 		{
9137 		    /* need to expand another component of the path */
9138 		    /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
9139 		    (void)unix_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags, FALSE);
9140 		}
9141 		else
9142 		{
9143 		    /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
9144 		    /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
9145 		    if (*path_end != NUL)
9146 			backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
9147 		    if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
9148 		    {
9149 #ifdef MACOS_CONVERT
9150 			size_t precomp_len = STRLEN(buf)+1;
9151 			char_u *precomp_buf =
9152 			    mac_precompose_path(buf, precomp_len, &precomp_len);
9153 
9154 			if (precomp_buf)
9155 			{
9156 			    mch_memmove(buf, precomp_buf, precomp_len);
9157 			    vim_free(precomp_buf);
9158 			}
9159 #endif
9160 			addfile(gap, buf, flags);
9161 		    }
9162 		}
9163 	    }
9164 	}
9165 
9166 	closedir(dirp);
9167     }
9168 
9169     vim_free(buf);
9170     vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
9171 
9172     matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
9173     if (matches > 0)
9174 	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, matches,
9175 						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
9176     return matches;
9177 }
9178 #endif
9179 
9180 /*
9181  * Generic wildcard expansion code.
9182  *
9183  * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
9184  * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
9185  *
9186  * Return FAIL when no single file was found.  In this case "num_file" is not
9187  * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
9188  * Return OK when some files found.  "num_file" is set to the number of
9189  * matches, "file" to the array of matches.  Call FreeWild() later.
9190  */
9191     int
9192 gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
9193     int		num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
9194     char_u	**pat;		/* array of input patterns */
9195     int		*num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
9196     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
9197     int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
9198 {
9199     int			i;
9200     garray_T		ga;
9201     char_u		*p;
9202     static int		recursive = FALSE;
9203     int			add_pat;
9204 
9205     /*
9206      * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user".  If this fails,
9207      * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here.  In this case, always
9208      * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible.  Otherwise,
9209      * return FAIL.
9210      */
9211     if (recursive)
9212 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
9213 	return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
9214 #else
9215 	return FAIL;
9216 #endif
9217 
9218 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
9219     /*
9220      * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
9221      * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion.  This
9222      * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
9223      * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
9224      */
9225     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
9226     {
9227 	if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
9228 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
9229 		&& !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
9230 # endif
9231 	   )
9232 	    return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
9233     }
9234 #endif
9235 
9236     recursive = TRUE;
9237 
9238     /*
9239      * The matching file names are stored in a growarray.  Init it empty.
9240      */
9241     ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
9242 
9243     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
9244     {
9245 	add_pat = -1;
9246 	p = pat[i];
9247 
9248 #ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
9249 	if (vim_backtick(p))
9250 	    add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
9251 	else
9252 #endif
9253 	{
9254 	    /*
9255 	     * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
9256 	     */
9257 	    if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
9258 	    {
9259 		p = expand_env_save_opt(p, TRUE);
9260 		if (p == NULL)
9261 		    p = pat[i];
9262 #ifdef UNIX
9263 		/*
9264 		 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
9265 		 * variable, use the shell to do that.  Discard previously
9266 		 * found file names and start all over again.
9267 		 */
9268 		else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
9269 		{
9270 		    vim_free(p);
9271 		    ga_clear_strings(&ga);
9272 		    i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
9273 								       flags);
9274 		    recursive = FALSE;
9275 		    return i;
9276 		}
9277 #endif
9278 	    }
9279 
9280 	    /*
9281 	     * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
9282 	     * the list.  If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
9283 	     * the pattern.
9284 	     * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
9285 	     * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
9286 	     */
9287 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
9288 		add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
9289 	}
9290 
9291 	if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
9292 	{
9293 	    char_u	*t = backslash_halve_save(p);
9294 
9295 #if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
9296 	    slash_to_colon(t);
9297 #endif
9298 	    /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs.  Makes
9299 	     * "vim c:/" work. */
9300 	    if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
9301 		addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
9302 	    else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
9303 		addfile(&ga, t, flags);
9304 	    vim_free(t);
9305 	}
9306 
9307 	if (p != pat[i])
9308 	    vim_free(p);
9309     }
9310 
9311     *num_file = ga.ga_len;
9312     *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
9313 
9314     recursive = FALSE;
9315 
9316     return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
9317 }
9318 
9319 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
9320 
9321 /*
9322  * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
9323  */
9324     static int
9325 vim_backtick(p)
9326     char_u	*p;
9327 {
9328     return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
9329 }
9330 
9331 /*
9332  * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
9333  * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
9334  * Returns number of file names found.
9335  */
9336     static int
9337 expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
9338     garray_T	*gap;
9339     char_u	*pat;
9340     int		flags;	/* EW_* flags */
9341 {
9342     char_u	*p;
9343     char_u	*cmd;
9344     char_u	*buffer;
9345     int		cnt = 0;
9346     int		i;
9347 
9348     /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
9349     cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
9350     if (cmd == NULL)
9351 	return 0;
9352 
9353 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL
9354     if (*cmd == '=')	    /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
9355 	buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p, TRUE);
9356     else
9357 #endif
9358 	buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
9359 				      (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
9360     vim_free(cmd);
9361     if (buffer == NULL)
9362 	return 0;
9363 
9364     cmd = buffer;
9365     while (*cmd != NUL)
9366     {
9367 	cmd = skipwhite(cmd);		/* skip over white space */
9368 	p = cmd;
9369 	while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
9370 	    ++p;
9371 	/* add an entry if it is not empty */
9372 	if (p > cmd)
9373 	{
9374 	    i = *p;
9375 	    *p = NUL;
9376 	    addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
9377 	    *p = i;
9378 	    ++cnt;
9379 	}
9380 	cmd = p;
9381 	while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
9382 	    ++cmd;
9383     }
9384 
9385     vim_free(buffer);
9386     return cnt;
9387 }
9388 # endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
9389 
9390 /*
9391  * Add a file to a file list.  Accepted flags:
9392  * EW_DIR	add directories
9393  * EW_FILE	add files
9394  * EW_EXEC	add executable files
9395  * EW_NOTFOUND	add even when it doesn't exist
9396  * EW_ADDSLASH	add slash after directory name
9397  */
9398     void
9399 addfile(gap, f, flags)
9400     garray_T	*gap;
9401     char_u	*f;	/* filename */
9402     int		flags;
9403 {
9404     char_u	*p;
9405     int		isdir;
9406 
9407     /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
9408     if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
9409 	return;
9410 
9411 #ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
9412     /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
9413     if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
9414 	return;
9415 #endif
9416 
9417     isdir = mch_isdir(f);
9418     if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
9419 	return;
9420 
9421     /* If the file isn't executable, may not add it.  Do accept directories. */
9422     if (!isdir && (flags & EW_EXEC) && !mch_can_exe(f))
9423 	return;
9424 
9425     /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
9426     if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
9427 	return;
9428 
9429     p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
9430     if (p == NULL)
9431 	return;
9432 
9433     STRCPY(p, f);
9434 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
9435     slash_adjust(p);
9436 #endif
9437     /*
9438      * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
9439      */
9440 #ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
9441     if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
9442 	add_pathsep(p);
9443 #endif
9444     ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
9445 }
9446 #endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
9447 
9448 #if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
9449 
9450 #ifndef SEEK_SET
9451 # define SEEK_SET 0
9452 #endif
9453 #ifndef SEEK_END
9454 # define SEEK_END 2
9455 #endif
9456 
9457 /*
9458  * Get the stdout of an external command.
9459  * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
9460  */
9461     char_u *
9462 get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
9463     char_u	*cmd;
9464     char_u	*infile;	/* optional input file name */
9465     int		flags;		/* can be SHELL_SILENT */
9466 {
9467     char_u	*tempname;
9468     char_u	*command;
9469     char_u	*buffer = NULL;
9470     int		len;
9471     int		i = 0;
9472     FILE	*fd;
9473 
9474     if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
9475 	return NULL;
9476 
9477     /* get a name for the temp file */
9478     if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
9479     {
9480 	EMSG(_(e_notmp));
9481 	return NULL;
9482     }
9483 
9484     /* Add the redirection stuff */
9485     command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
9486     if (command == NULL)
9487 	goto done;
9488 
9489     /*
9490      * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
9491      * Don't check timestamps here.
9492      */
9493     ++no_check_timestamps;
9494     call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
9495     --no_check_timestamps;
9496 
9497     vim_free(command);
9498 
9499     /*
9500      * read the names from the file into memory
9501      */
9502 # ifdef VMS
9503     /* created temporary file is not always readable as binary */
9504     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
9505 # else
9506     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
9507 # endif
9508 
9509     if (fd == NULL)
9510     {
9511 	EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
9512 	goto done;
9513     }
9514 
9515     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
9516     len = ftell(fd);		    /* get size of temp file */
9517     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
9518 
9519     buffer = alloc(len + 1);
9520     if (buffer != NULL)
9521 	i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
9522     fclose(fd);
9523     mch_remove(tempname);
9524     if (buffer == NULL)
9525 	goto done;
9526 #ifdef VMS
9527     len = i;	/* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
9528 #endif
9529     if (i != len)
9530     {
9531 	EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
9532 	vim_free(buffer);
9533 	buffer = NULL;
9534     }
9535     else
9536 	buffer[len] = '\0';	/* make sure the buffer is terminated */
9537 
9538 done:
9539     vim_free(tempname);
9540     return buffer;
9541 }
9542 #endif
9543 
9544 /*
9545  * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
9546  * functions.
9547  */
9548     void
9549 FreeWild(count, files)
9550     int	    count;
9551     char_u  **files;
9552 {
9553     if (count <= 0 || files == NULL)
9554 	return;
9555 #if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
9556     /*
9557      * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
9558      * been used???
9559      */
9560     _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
9561 #else
9562     while (count--)
9563 	vim_free(files[count]);
9564     vim_free(files);
9565 #endif
9566 }
9567 
9568 /*
9569  * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
9570  * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
9571  * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
9572  */
9573     int
9574 goto_im()
9575 {
9576     return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
9577 }
9578